2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner's Manual

2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 1-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 2-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 3-1Additional Storage Features . . . 3-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Instruments and Controls . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel Overview. . . . 4-4Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 4-27Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 4-39OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 6-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 6-33Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 7-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 8-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 8-28Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 8-35Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 8-41Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44Object Detection Systems . . . . 8-46Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 8-64

2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81

Service and Maintenance . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-1Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 10-2Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 10-7

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 10-10

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 12-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 12-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 12-13Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1

Introduction iii

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, theGM Emblem, CHEVROLET, theCHEVROLET Emblem, the nameEquinox and the Equinox Emblemare registered trademarks ofGeneral Motors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchaseor due to changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner manual.

Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forChevrolet Motor Division whereverit appears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Manufactured under licenseunder U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;6,487,535 & other U.S. andworldwide patents issued &pending. DTS and DTS DigitalSurround are registered trademarksand the DTS logos and Symbolare trademarks of DTS, Inc.© 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All RightsReserved.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 25798562 B Second Printing ©2009 General Motors. All Rights Reserved.

iv Introduction

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarksof Dolby Laboratories. Copyright1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories.All rights reserved.

This product incorporates copyrightprotection technology that isprotected by U.S. patents and otherintellectual property rights. Use ofthis copyright protection technologymust be authorized by Macrovision,and is intended for home and other

limited viewing uses only unlessotherwise authorized byMacrovision. Reverse engineeringor disassembly is prohibited.

“Made for iPod” means that anelectronic accessory has beendesigned to connect specificallyto iPod and has been certifiedby the developer to meet Appleperformance standards. iPod is atrademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,registered in the U.S. and othercountries.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.com

Introduction v

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage.This would not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it isa safety symbol which means“Do Not,” “Do not do this” or “Do notlet this happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message, gage,or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

vi Introduction

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gage

+ : Fuses

i : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid

Keys, Doors and Windows 1-1

Keys, Doors andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

DoorsLiftgate (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Liftgate (Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 1-12Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 1-13

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 1-15Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

1-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons, children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key, that is part of the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,can be used for the ignition and alllocks.

Press the button on the RKEtransmitter to extend the key.Press the button and the key bladeto retract the key.

See your dealer/retailer if a new keyis needed.

Notice: If you ever lock your keysin the vehicle, you may have todamage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.

If you are locked out of the vehicle,see Roadside Assistance Programon page 12‑6 or OnStar® Systemon page 4‑44.


Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 12‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industryand Science Canada.

Changes or modifications to thissystem by other than an authorizedservice facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer/retailer or a qualifiedtechnician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter will work up to 60 m(195 feet) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 1‑3.

RKE without Remote Start Shown

The following may be available:

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate locking, see “RemoteLock Feedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 4‑39. If apassenger door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock. If the driverdoor is open when Q is pressed, alldoors lock except the driver door.These settings can be modified.


See “Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 4‑39.

Pressing Q may also arm thetheft-deterrent system. SeeAnti-Theft Alarm System onpage 1‑12.

K (Unlock): Press to unlockthe driver door or all doors, see“Remote Door Unlock” underVehicle Personalization onpage 4‑39. The turn signalindicators flash to indicate unlockinghas occurred. For more informationsee “Remote Unlock LightFeedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 4‑39.Pressing K may also disarmthe theft-deterrent system.See Anti-Theft Alarm System onpage 1‑12.

V (Remote Liftgate Release):First press K , then press and

holdV to unlock the liftgate.For vehicles with the power liftgate,press and holdV until the liftgatebegins to move to open the liftgate.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release onetime to locate the vehicle. Theexterior lamps flash and the hornchirps. Press and hold 7 for at leasttwo seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and theturn signals flash until 7 is pressedagain or the key is placed in theignition and turned to ON/RUN.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, first pressQ then press and hold/ to startthe engine from outside the vehicleusing the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Vehicle Start on page 1‑5for additional information.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmittersprogrammed to this vehicle willwork. If a transmitter is lost orstolen, a replacement can bepurchased and programmedthrough your dealer/retailer.When the replacement transmitteris programmed to this vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also bereprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters will no longer workonce the new transmitter isprogrammed.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the “ReplaceBattery in Remote Key” messagedisplays in the DIC. See “ReplaceBattery in Remote Key” under Keyand Lock Messages on page 4‑35.

The battery is not rechargeable.See your dealer/retailer to replacethe battery.


Remote Vehicle StartThe vehicle may have this featurethat allows you to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start):This button will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle has remotestart. To enable and disable remotestart, see “Remote Vehicle Start”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 4‑39.

Vehicles with an automatic climatecontrol system will default to aheating or cooling mode dependingon the outside temperature during aremote start. Once the key is turnedto ON/RUN, the system will turn onat the setting the vehicle was lastset to.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsrequire a person using remotestart to have the vehicle in view.Check local regulations for anyrequirements.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 1‑3for additional information.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.

2. Press and hold / for abouttwo seconds. The turn signallamps will briefly flash to confirmthe vehicle has been started.The parking lamps will turn onand remain on as long as theengine is running. The vehicle'sdoors will be locked.

3. The key must be inserted andturned to ON/RUN beforedriving.

The engine will shut off after10 minutes unless a timeextension is done or the key isinserted and turned to ON/RUN.

Extending Engine Run Time

For a 10-minute extension, repeatSteps 1 and 2 while the engine isstill running. The remote start canbe extended once.

When the remote start is extended,the second 10 minutes will startimmediately.

For example, if the engine has beenrunning for five minutes, and10 minutes are added, the enginewill run for a total of 15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts orremote start attempts are allowedbetween ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition switch mustbe turned to ON/RUN and then backto LOCK/OFF using the key, beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.


Shutting the Engine Off After aRemote Start

To shut off the engine:. Press / until the parking lamps

turn off.. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Insert the key and turn it to

ON/RUN and then back toLOCK/OFF.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:. The key is in the ignition.. The hood or doors are not

closed.. The hazard warning flashers

are on.. There is an emission control

system malfunction.. The engine coolant temperature

is too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts havealready been used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle ina crash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly andthe doors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock or unlock a door from theoutside of the vehicle, use theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. Pull the handle oncefrom the inside to unlock the door,and a second time to open it.


Power Door Locks

A. Door Unlock

B. Door Lock

C. Safety Lock

The power door lock switches arelocated on the instrument panel.. Press (A) to unlock the doors.. Remove the key from the

ignition and press (B) to lock thedoors.

When locking the doors with thepower lock switch and a door or theliftgate is open, the doors will lockfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switchtwice or Q on the RKE transmittertwice will override the delayedlocking feature and immediatelylock all the doors.

This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

This feature can be programmed.See “Delayed Door Lock” underVehicle Personalization onpage 4‑39.

Safety LocksRear door security locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from the inside.

Press (C) to activate the safetylocks. Once activated, the LEDlight, changes to amber.

Pressing the button againdeactivates the safety locks.

See Power Door Locks onpage 1‑7 .


Doors

Liftgate (Manual)

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass throughthe seal between the bodyand the trunk/hatch or liftgate.Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 8‑34.

Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make sure thearea above and behind the liftgateis clear before opening it.

Press the touchpad located in thehandle of the liftgate, above thelicense plate, and lift up to open.

Do not press the touchpad whileclosing the liftgate. This will causethe liftgate to be unlatched.

Always close the liftgate beforedriving.


Liftgate (Power)

Power Liftgate Operation

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass throughthe seal between the bodyand the trunk/hatch or liftgate.Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.


(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.


On vehicles with a power liftgate,the switch is located on theoverhead console. The vehiclemust be in P (Park) to use thepower feature. The taillamps flashwhen the power liftgate moves.

{ WARNING

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make sure thearea above and behind the liftgateis clear before opening it.

The power liftgate has three modesof operation. Mode selection iscontrolled by the interior modeswitch.


Choose the power liftgate modeby turning the dial on the switchuntil the indicator lines up with thedesired position. The vehicle mustbe in P (Park).

The three modes are:

MAX : The liftgate power opens tothe full open height.

3/4 : The liftgate power opens to areduced open height that can be setby the vehicle operator. Use thissetting to prevent the liftgate fromopening into overhead obstructions

such as a garage door or roofmounted cargo during poweroperation. The liftgate can still befully opened manually.

OFF: The liftgate only operatesmanually in this position.

Manual operation of a liftgate thatalso has power operation requiresmore effort than with a standardmanual liftgate.

In either the MAX or the 3/4 mode,the liftgate can be power openedand closed by:

. First pressing K and then

pressing and holdingV on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter until the liftgate startsmoving. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operationon page 1‑3 .

. Pressing the power liftgatebutton on the center of the modeswitch, located on the overheadconsole.

. Pressing the touchpad switch onthe liftgate outside handle toopen the liftgate.

Press and release& on theliftgate adjacent to the latch to closethe liftgate.


Pressing any button, or thetouchpad switch while the liftgate ismoving stops it. Pressing the buttonor RKE switch again reverses thedirection. The touch pad switchwill stop the liftgate from moving.There is a minimum distance thatthe power liftgate must already beopen for the system to hold it open.If movement is stopped below thatminimum the liftgate closes.

Do not force the liftgate open orclosed during a power cycle.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled under extremetemperatures or low batteryconditions. If this occurs, the liftgatecan still be operated manually.

If you shift the transmission out ofP (Park) while the power functionis in progress, the liftgate powerfunction will continue to completion.If you shift the transmission out ofP (Park) and accelerate before thepower liftgate latch is closed, theliftgate may reverse to the open

position. Cargo could fall out of thevehicle. Always make sure thepower liftgate is closed and latchedbefore you drive away.

If you power open the liftgate andthe liftgate support struts have lostpressure, the turn signals flash anda chime sounds. The liftgate staysopen temporarily, then slowlycloses. See your dealer/retailer forservice before using the liftgate.

Obstacle Detection Features

If the liftgate encounters an obstacleduring a power open or closecycle, a warning chime will soundand the liftgate will automaticallyreverse direction to the full closedor open position. After removingthe obstruction, the power liftgateoperation can be used again.If the liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same powercycle, the power function willdeactivate. The “Manually ClosePower Liftgate” warning message inthe Driver Information Center (DIC)

will display. After removing theobstructions, the liftgate willresume normal power operation.

Your vehicle has pinch sensorslocated on the side edges of theliftgate. If an object is caughtbetween the liftgate and the bodyand presses against this sensor, theliftgate will reverse direction andopen fully. The liftgate will remainopen until it is activated again orclosed manually.

Setting the Power Liftgate3/4 Mode

To change the liftgate stop position:

1. Turn the liftgate switch to the3/4 mode position and poweropen the liftgate.

2. Stop the liftgate movement atthe desired height by pressingany switch.

3. Press and hold the button on theliftgate adjacent to the latch untilthe turn signals flash and a beepsounds to indicate that the newsetting is recorded.


When power opened with the3/4 mode selected, the liftgatestops at the new set position.

There is a minimum that the powerliftgate must already be open for thesystem to hold it open. The liftgatecannot be set to stop below thatminimum.

Manual Operation of PowerLiftgate

To change the liftgate to manualoperation, turn the mode switch tothe OFF position.

With the power liftgate disabledand all of the doors unlocked, theliftgate can be manually openedand closed. Manual operation ofa liftgate that also has poweroperation requires more effort thanwith a standard manual liftgate.

To open the liftgate, press thetouchpad on the handle on theoutside of the liftgate, and lift thegate open. To close the liftgate, usethe pull cup to lower the liftgateand close. With the power liftgatedisabled the liftgate electric latchwill still power latch once contact ismade with the striker. Always closethe liftgate before driving.

If the RKE button is pressed whilepower operation is disabled, the turnsignals flash and the liftgate willnot move.

The liftgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected orhas low voltage, the liftgate willnot open. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.

Vehicle SecurityVehicle theft is big business,especially in some cities. Thisvehicle has theft-deterrent features,however, they do not make itimpossible to steal.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

Arming the System

To arm the system, either:

. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.

. Or, lock the vehicle using thekey in the driver door.

The alarm automatically arms afterabout 30 seconds. The securitylight, located on the instrumentpanel, flashes.

PressV on the RKE transmitter toopen the liftgate without setting offthe alarm. The system rearms whenthe liftgate is closed.


Disarming the System

To disarm the system, do one of thefollowing:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

. Allow the alarm to time out afterabout 30 seconds and resetitself.

The alarm automatically disarms.

If the system is armed and any dooris unlocked without pressing K onthe RKE transmitter the alarmsounds.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed and the hornsounds, an attempted break-in hasoccurred while the system wasarmed.

If the alarm has been activated,the “Theft Attempted” message willappear on the DIC. See Key andLock Messages on page 4‑35 foradditional information.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 12‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industryand Science Canada.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key.

The key uses a transponder thatmatches an immobilizer control unitin the vehicle and automaticallydisarms the system. Only thecorrect key starts the vehicle. Thevehicle may not start if the key isdamaged.

The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comeson if there is a problem with armingor disarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.


If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamagedor the light continues to stay on, tryanother ignition key. If the enginedoes not start with the other key, thevehicle needs service. If the vehicledoes start, the first key may bedamaged. See your dealer/retailerwho can service the theft-deterrentsystem and have a new key made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on thedriver door.

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Move the selector switch toL (left) or R (right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move each mirror to thedesired direction.


3. Adjust each outside mirror sothat the side of the vehicle andthe area behind are seen.

4. Return the selector switch to themiddle position.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underAutomatic Climate Control Systemon page 7‑3 for more information.

Park Tilt MirrorsIf the vehicle has the memorypackage, the outside mirrors havea park tilt feature. This featureautiomatically tilts the outsidemirrors to a preselected positionwhen the vehicle is in R (Reverse).This allows the driver to view thecurb for parallel parking.

The passenger and driver mirrorsreturn to their original positionwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or the ignition is turnedoff or to OFF/LOCK.

This feature can be turned on oroff through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See VehiclePersonalization on page 4‑39 formore information.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorHold the inside rearview mirror inthe center to move it for a clearerview of behind your vehicle. Adjustthe mirror to avoid glare from theheadlamps behind you. Push thetab forward for daytime use and pullit for nighttime use.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threeadditional control buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer/retailer for more informationon the system and how to subscribeto OnStar. See OnStar® System onpage 4‑44 for more informationabout the services OnStar provides.


Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threeadditional control buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer/retailer for more informationon the system and how to subscribeto OnStar. See OnStar® System onpage 4‑44 for more informationabout the services OnStar provides.

O : Press to turn automaticdimming on or off.

If the vehicle has a rear visioncamera (RVC) theO button forturning the automatic dimmingfeature on or off will not beavailable. See Rear Vision Camera(RVC) on page 8‑49 for moreinformation.

Automatic Dimming MirrorOperation

Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature comes on and the indicatorlight comes on each time the vehicleis started.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.


Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move.The windows will function andthey could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavekeys in a vehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

Uplevel shown, base similar

The power window controls arelocated on each of the side doors.

The driver door also has switchesthat control the passenger andrear windows. The power windowswork when the ignition is inACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN orwhen Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 8‑29.

Press or pull on the switch to loweror raise the window.


Express Down Windows

Windows that have theexpress‐down feature allow thewindows to be lowered withoutholding the switch. Press thewindow switch fully and releaseit to activate the express‐downfeature. The express mode canbe canceled at any time by brieflypressing, or pulling the switch.

Programming the PowerWindows

Programming the power windowsmay be necessary if the vehicle'sbattery has been disconnected ordischarged.

To program the window:

1. Close all doors with the ignitionin the ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN position, or whenRetained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active.See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 8‑29.

2. Press and continue to hold thewindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull up and hold the windowswitch to close the window.Continue to hold it briefly afterthe window is fully closed.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The windowlockout switch is located on thedriver door. This feature preventsthe rear passenger windows fromoperating, except from the driverposition. Press the switch to turnthe lockout feature on or off. Anindicator light shows the featureis on.

Sun VisorsPull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount and slide it along therod from side-to-side to cover thedriver or passenger side of the frontwindow. Swing the sun visor tothe side to cover the side window.It can be moved along the rod fromside-to-side in this position also.


Roof

SunroofOn vehicles with a sunroof, theswitches used to operate it arelocated on the headliner above therearview mirror. The ignition must bein ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,or in Retained Accessory Power(RAP) to operate the sunroof. SeeIgnition Positions on page 8‑28 andRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 8‑29.

. Press and hold the front orrear of the driver side switch toopen or close the sunroof. Thesunshade automatically openswith the sunroof, but must beclosed manually.

. Press and hold the front of thepassenger side switch to ventthe sunroof. Press and hold therear of the switch to close.

Express-open/Express-close

Press and release the front orrear of the driver side switch toexpress-open or express-close thesunroof.

Anti-Pinch Feature

If an object is in the path of thesunroof when it is closing, theanti-pinch feature detects the objectand stops the sunroof from closingat the point of the obstruction. Thesunroof then returns to the full-openposition.


2 NOTES

Seats and Restraints 2-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 2-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 2-24Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 2-27When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 2-38

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 2-40Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-40

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 2-46Where to Put the Restraint . . . 2-48Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 2-55

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 2-58

2-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe vehicle's front and rear seatshave head restraints in all outboardseating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

1. Pull the head restraint up toraise it. To lower the headrestraint, press the releasebutton, located on the headrestraint post on the top of theseatback, while you push thehead restraint down.

2. Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released tomake sure that it is locked inplace.

The vehicle's rear seat headrestraints are not adjustable.


Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver's seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver's seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seat position:

1. Pull the handle located at thefront of the seat.

2. Move the seat forward orbackward to adjust the seatposition.

3. Release the handle to stop theseat from moving.


Power Seat Adjustment

Driver Seat with Power SeatControl, Power Recline,

and Power Lumbar shown

A: Memory Seat Adjustment

B: Power Seat Adjustment

C: Power Recline Adjustment

D: Power Lumbar Adjustment

Driver Seat with Power SeatControl, Power Lumbar,

and Manual Recline shown

D: Power Lumbar Adjustment

E: Power Seat Adjustment

F: Manual Recline Adjustment

On vehicles with power seats, thecontrols are located on the outboardside of the seats.

Adjust the power seat by moving thecontrol (B) forward or rearward, upor down, or by pressing the top orbottom of control (E).

Adjust the seatback by moving thecontrol (C) forward or rearward.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 2‑6 for more information.

Adjust the lumbar support byusing the control (D). See LumbarAdjustment on page 2‑6 formore information.

Memory Seats

The vehicle may have a memoryseat allowing saved and recalledseat settings. Controls (A) arelocated on the outboard side ofthe seat.


To save:

1. Adjust the driver seat, includingthe seatback recliner, and bothoutside mirrors, to a comfortableposition.

2. Press and hold the MEM buttonand button 1 at the same timeuntil a beep indicates theposition is stored.

A second seating and mirrorposition can be programmed byrepeating the above steps andpressing button 2.

To recall the memory positions, thevehicle must be in P (Park). Pressand hold either button 1 or button 2corresponding to the desired drivingposition. The seat, outside mirrorsand pedals, if available move to thestored position. Releasing thebutton before the stored positionis reached cancels the recall.

Entry using the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter withthe remote recall feature onautomatically adjusts the seat andmirrors. There is no adjustmentwhen the position has not beenchanged by another seatingposition.

When the remote recall feature ison, the seat and mirror position willbe stored when the ignition is turnedto LOCK/OFF. It is stored accordingto the RKE transmitter used to startthe vehicle.

To stop recall movement of the RKEremote recall feature, press one ofthe power seat controls, memorybuttons, or power mirror buttons.

Memory Seat recall may stop ifthe seat is blocked. Remove theobstruction and then press thememory button again. If the memoryfunction does not work properly, seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

Easy Exit Seat

If the easy exit seat feature is on inthe Driver Information Center (DIC),automatic adjustment occurs whenthe ignition is turned to LOCK/OFFand the driver door is opened. Thedriver seat moves back.

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 4‑39 for more information.


Lumbar Adjustment

Power Lumbar

Seats with power lumbar havecontrols located on the outboardside of the seat. See Power SeatAdjustment on page 2‑4 for moreinformation.

Adjust lumbar support by using therocker switch (D) on the outboardside of the driver seat.

Release the switch when theseatback reaches the desired levelof lumbar support.

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver's seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver's seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

Vehicles with manual recliningseatbacks have a lever on theoutboard side of the seat. Lift thelever and move the seatback to thedesired position, then release thelever. The seatback should notmove when pushed or pulled.


Power Reclining Seatbacks

On vehicles with power recliningseatbacks, the switch is located onthe outboard side of the seat. SeePower Seat Adjustment onpage 2‑4 for more information.

Move the switch forward or rearwardto adjust the seatback.

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifyour vehicle is moving.


Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn ormay damage the seat.

On vehicles with heated front seats,the controls are located near theclimate controls. To operate theheated seats the ignition must bein ON/RUN.

Press the button L to heat the seatcushion and seatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press, theheated seat will change to the next

lower setting, and then the offsetting. The lights indicate three forthe highest setting and one for thelowest.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

When Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is used to remote startthe vehicle, the front heated seatswill heat to the highest setting if it iscold outside. When the ignition isturned on with the key the heatedseat feature turns off. Press thebutton to turn the feature back on.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 1‑5 .


Rear SeatsSplit Folding Seatbacks

With this feature, either side of therear seatback can be folded downfor more cargo space.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. After raisingthe rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety beltsare properly routed and attached,and are not twisted.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

1. To fold the seatback down:

The rear safety belts must beunbuckled and the frontseatbacks are not reclined.

2. Lift the lever located on the topof the seatback.

3. Fold the seatback forward.

Keep the seat in the upright lockedposition when not in use.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift and hold the lever located ontop of the seatback.

2. Tilt the seatback rearward, thenrelease the lever when theseatback is in the desiredposition.


Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or beejected from the vehicle. You andyour passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be,if you are buckled up. Alwaysfasten your safety belt, and checkthat your passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 4‑15 for additionalinformation.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in acrash. If you do have a crash, youdo not know if it will be aserious one.

A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!


Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.


The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down asthe vehicle does. You get more timeto stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safetybelts make such good sense.


Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safetybelt, even if you areupside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection. That is true notonly in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver doesnot protect you from thingsbeyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within40 km (25miles) of home. Andthe greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur atspeeds of less than65 km/h (40 mph).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there are differentrules for smaller children andinfants. If a child will be riding in thevehicle, see Older Children onpage 2‑41 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 2‑43. Followthose rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehicle in acrash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safetybelts.


First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important information youshould know.

Sit up straight and always keep yourfeet on the floor in front of you. Thelap part of the belt should be wornlow and snug on the hips, just

touching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvicbones and you would be less likelyto slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply forceon your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.


{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.


A: The lap belt is too loose. It willnot give nearly as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourlap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lapbelt and apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Thelap belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touchingthe thighs.



A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt is buckled in the wrongplace like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there,not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your beltinto the buckle nearest you.


A: The belt is over an armrest.


{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt goes over an armrestlike this. The belt would be muchtoo high. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.


A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyou wear the shoulder belt underyour arm. In a crash, your bodywould move too far forward,which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, thebelt would apply too much forceto the ribs, which are not asstrong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across thechest.



A: The belt is behind the body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could move toofar forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. Youmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.


Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 2‑23.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you.See “Shoulder Belt HeightAdjustment” later in this sectionfor instructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.


To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. For outboard seatingpositions, slide the latch plate upthe safety belt webbing when thesafety belt is not in use. The latchplate should rest on the stitching onthe safety belt, near the guide loop.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so that theshoulder portion of the belt iscentered on the shoulder. The beltshould be away from the face andneck, but not falling off the shoulder.Improper shoulder belt heightadjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in acrash.

Move the height adjuster up to thedesired position by pushing up onthe height adjuster.

After the height adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it up ordown without pressing the releasebutton (A) to make sure it haslocked into position. Press therelease button to lower the heightadjuster.


Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they need to be replaced, and othernew parts for the vehicle's safetybelt system may be required. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System PartsAfter a Crash on page 2‑24.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer/retailer. The guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for olderchildren who have outgrown boosterseats and for some adults. Wheninstalled and properly adjusted, thecomfort guide positions the beltaway from the neck and head.

There is one guide for each outsidepassenger position in the rear seat.Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage pocket on the side of theseatback.


2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. The belt should not be twistedand it should lie flat. The elasticcord must be under the belt andthe guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.


4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure that the shoulder beltcrosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide back into its storagepocket located on the side of theseatback.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer/retailer willorder you an extender. When yougo in to order it, take the heaviestcoat you will wear, so the extenderwill be long enough for you. To helpavoid personal injury, do not letsomeone else use it, and use it onlyfor the seat it is made to fit. Theextender has been designed foradults. Never use it for securingchild seats. To wear it, attach it tothe regular safety belt. For moreinformation, see the instructionsheet that comes with the extender.


Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors andanchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn orfrayed safety belts may not protectyou in a crash. They can rip apartunder impact forces. If a belt is tornor frayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 4‑15 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care onpage 2‑24.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

safety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer/retailer to have thesafety belt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 4‑16.


Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the right frontpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the right front passenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along the trim.

Even if you do not have a right frontpassenger seat in the vehicle thereis still an active frontal airbag in theright side of the instrument panel.Do not place cargo in front of thisairbag.

{ WARNING

Be sure that cargo is not near anairbag. In a crash, an inflatingairbag might force that objecttoward a person. This couldcause severe injury or evendeath. Secure objects away fromthe area in which an airbag wouldinflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 2‑27 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 8‑24.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.


Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt— even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 2‑29.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in yourvehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 2‑41 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 2‑43.


There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 4‑16 formore information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger side.


Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

(Continued)


WARNING (Continued)

Do not use seat accessoriesthat block the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's or rightfront passenger's head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on howfast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. Forexample:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.


Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags. SeeAirbag System on page 2‑25.

Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof-railairbags are intended to inflateduring a rollover or in a severefrontal impact. Seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate in frontalimpacts, near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-railairbags are not intended to inflate inrear impacts. A seat-mounted sideimpact airbag is intended to deployon the side of the vehicle that isstruck. Both roof-rail airbags will

deploy when either side of thevehicle is struck, or if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over, or in a severefrontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because ofwhat the repair costs were. Forfrontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down. Forseat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact. In arollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.


What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags,there are airbag modules in the sideof the front seatbacks closest to thedoor. For vehicles with roof-railairbags, there are airbag modules inthe ceiling of the vehicle, near theside windows that have occupantseating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.Seat‐mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help inmany types of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 2‑29 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.


What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑31.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.

You can lock the doors, turn off theinterior lamps and hazard warningflashers by using the controls forthose features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.


In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 12‑15 and Event DataRecorders on page 12‑15.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer/retailerfor service.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visibleon the overhead console when thevehicle is started.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, are visibleduring the system check. If you areusing remote start, if equipped, tostart the vehicle from a distance,you may not see the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 4‑17.


The passenger sensing systemturns off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbag,seat‐mounted side impact airbagsand the roof-rail airbags are notaffected by the passenger sensingsystem.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seat. Thesensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger frontal airbagshould be enabled (may inflate)or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including:an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriously

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

injured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.


The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a childrestraint.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 4‑17.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the right front passenger frontalairbag, depending upon theperson’s seating posture and body

build. Everyone in the vehiclewho has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 4‑16 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.


If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints(Rear Seat ) on page 2‑56 orSecuring Child Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 2‑58.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatbackand adjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 2‑2 .

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off theairbag for a child in a childrestraint depending upon thechild’s seating posture and bodybuild. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,


use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importanceof proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how wellthe passenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend thatyou not use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 2‑38 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:. The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passengerairbag when liquid is soaked intothe seat. If this happens, the offindicator will be lit, and theairbag readiness light on theinstrument panel will also be lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will enable (turnon) the passenger airbag while achild restraint or child occupantis on the seat. If the passengerairbag is turned on, the onindicator will be lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 4‑16for important safety information.


The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put on anunoccupied seat. If this is notdesired remove the object fromthe seat.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle.

Your dealer/retailer and the servicemanual have information aboutservicing the vehicle and the airbagsystem. To purchase a servicemanual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 12‑12.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors,rollover sensor module, or airbagwiring can affect the operation ofthe airbag system.


In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system forthe right front passengerposition, which includes sensorsthat are part of the passengerseat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operate properlyif the original seat trim isreplaced with non-GM covers,upholstery or trim, or with GMcovers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as anaftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.

This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing systemfrom properly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 2‑33.

If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 12‑1.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 9‑60 for additionalimportant information.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 12‑1.

In addition, your dealer/retailer andthe service manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.


Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 4‑16 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 2‑31. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in your vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly and maynot protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

To help make sure your airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 4‑16 for more information.


Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle's safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat, statethe weight and height limitations forthat booster. Use a booster seatwith a lap-shoulder belt until thechild passes the below fit test:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “Rear

Safety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 2‑19 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.


Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 2‑19.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.

(Continued)


WARNING (Continued)

The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues to

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.


Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If you must secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go.


Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicle'sowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particular

child restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain lowon the hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.


Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.


Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle's safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by

the LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 2‑50 formore information. Children can beendangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraintin the vehicle — even when no childis in it.

Securing the Child Withinthe Child Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.


Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 2‑33 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints not be transported in thevehicle, even if the airbag is off.


Wherever you install a childrestraint, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle — even when no childis in it.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat,review the following illustrations.Depending on where you place thechild restraint or the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access certain safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints.

Configurations for Use ofChild Restraints

A. Child restraint using LATCH

B. Occupant prohibited

A. Child restraint using LATCH

B. Occupant prohibited

C. Child restraint or occupant usingsafety belt

A. Child restraint or occupant usingsafety belt

A. Child restraint or occupant usingsafety belt

B. Child restraint using LATCH


Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH systemin your vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraintwith lower attachments (B).


Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

Your child restraint may have asingle tether (A) or a dual tether (C).Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

The rear outboard seating positionshave exposed metal anchorslocated in the crease between theseatback and the seat cushion.


Top Tether Anchors

The top tether anchors for each rearseating position are located on theback of the rear seatback. You mayneed to adjust the rear compartmentstorage panel/cover in the rearcargo area to access the anchors.

Be sure to use an anchor located onthe same side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 2‑48 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle'ssafety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand the instructions in thismanual.


{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

the shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if your vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

Make sure to attach the childrestraint at the proper anchorlocation.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.


1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Route, attach and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.


If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a dual tether, routethe tether around theheadrest or head restraint.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether over the headrestor head restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions to be sureit is secure.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer/retailer to havethe system inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.


Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat )When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 2‑50 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 2‑50 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 2‑48.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.


4. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 2‑50 for moreinformation.


To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.


Armrest Retaining Strap

{ WARNING

A rear center armrest that is notproperly stowed and securedcould fall forward during a suddenstop or collision. The armrestcould contact an infant secured ina rear‐facing child restraint in thecenter seat position. Fasten theretaining strap onto the stowedarmrest before installing a rear‐facing child restraint in the rearcenter seat position.

When new, the vehicle's glove boxmaterials included an armrestretaining strap. Use it to secure the

center armrest before installing arear‐facing child restraint in thesecond row center seat position.

Stow the rear seat center armrest.Attach the retaining strap to thearmrest loop (A) and to thecenter top tether anchor on theseatback (B). Make sure theretaining strap's clips are firmlyattached.

Install the rear-facing childrestraint using the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions and theinstructions described previously.

Remove the armrest retaining strapbefore installing a forward facingchild restraint in the center seatposition, as it may interfere with theattachment of the top tether to thetop tether anchor on the seatback.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 2‑48.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 2‑33 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 4‑17 for more information,including important safetyinformation.


A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one can

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 2‑33 for additionalinformation.

If the vehicle does not have arear seat that will accommodatea rear‐facing child restraint, arear‐facing child restraint shouldnot be installed in the vehicle, evenif the airbag is off.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 2‑50 for howand where to install the childrestraint using LATCH. If a childrestraint is secured using a safetybelt and it uses a top tether, seeLower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 2‑50 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.


You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat‐mounted side impactairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 4‑17.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle, so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.


6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restrainthas a top tether, follow thechild restraint manufacturer'sinstructions regrading the useof the top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 2‑50 for more information.


If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “Ifthe On Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 2‑33 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


2 NOTES

Storage 3-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . 3-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Center Console Storage . . . . . . 3-1

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel StorageThere may be a storagecompartment on the instrumentpanel. Pull the handle to open.

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by lifting up onthe lever.

CupholdersTwo cupholders are in the centerconsole. Cupholders may be locatedin the second row seat armrest. Toaccess, pull the armrest down.

Center Console StorageFor vehicles with center consolestorage, use the lever on the frontto open.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo CoverFor vehicles with a cargo cover, useit to cover items in the rear of thevehicle.

To remove the cover from thevehicle, pull both ends toward eachother. To reinstall, place each end ofthe cover in the holes behind therear seat.

Convenience NetThis vehicle may have aconvenience net located in the rearof the vehicle. Attach it to the cargotie-downs for storing small loads.

Do not use the net to store heavyloads.

3-2 Storage

Roof Rack System

{ WARNING

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— the windcan catch it while the vehicle isbeing driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collision,and damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMCertified accessory carrier.

This vehicle may be equipped with aroof rack. For roof racks that do nothave cross rails included, GMCertified cross rails can bepurchased as an accessory. Seeyour dealer/retailer for additionalinformation.

Notice: Loading cargo on theroof rack that weighs more than100 kg (220 lbs) or hangs over therear or sides of the vehicle maydamage the vehicle. Load cargoso that it rests evenly betweenthe crossrails, making sure tofasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecross rails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle's centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking or abrupt maneuvers,otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace. Do not exceed the maximumvehicle capacity when loading thevehicle. For more information onvehicle capacity and loading, seeVehicle Load Limits on page 8‑24.

The roof rack crossrails can belocked in four positions along theroof rack side rails.

Storage 3-3

Lift the lever to release and movethe crossrail.

Position the crossrail on both sidesof the vehicle at the same time.

Push the lever down to completelyengage into the side rail holes.

Slide the crossrails back and forthuntil the lock pins engage in theholes and a click is heard as thepins align and the crossrail locks.

Try sliding the crossrails forwardand backward to ensure that theyare correctly secured and that thelevers stay tight to the cross rails.

Do not stand on the plastic lowerbody panels when loading cargo onthe luggage carrier.

When the roof rack is not in use,lock one crossrail at the furthestforward position and lock the othercrossrail at the furthest rearwardposition to reduce wind noise.

3-4 Storage

2 NOTES

Instruments and Controls 4-1

Instruments andControls

Instrument Panel OverviewInstrument Panel Overview . . . . 4-4

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 4-6Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 4-6Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 4-7Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Clock (With Date Display) . . . 4-10Clock (Without DateDisplay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gages, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Fuel Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Engine CoolantTemperature Gage . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 4-15Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 4-16Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Charging System Light . . . . . . 4-18MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 4-23Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 4-23

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 4-24Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 4-24Fuel Economy Light . . . . . . . . . 4-25Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 4-25Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 4-26Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Lamps on Reminder . . . . . . . . . 4-27Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 4-27

4-2 Instruments and Controls

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Brake System Messages . . . . 4-32Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 4-32Cruise Control Messages . . . . 4-32Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 4-33Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 4-34Engine Power Messages . . . . 4-34Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 4-35Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 4-35Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

Airbag System Messages . . . . 4-37Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . 4-37Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Service Vehicle Messages . . . 4-37Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37Transmission Messages . . . . . 4-38Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 4-39

OnStar® SystemOnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44


2 NOTES


Instrument Panel Overview


A. Air Vents on page 7‑6.

B. Turn and Lane-Change Signalson page 5‑3 . Exterior LampControls on page 5‑1 . FogLamps on page 5‑3(If Equipped).

C. Instrument Cluster onpage 4‑13.

D. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 4‑7 . Rear WindowWiper/Washer on page 4‑8.

E. Power Door Unlock/Lock. SeePower Door Locks onpage 1‑7 .

F. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 3‑1 .

G. Safety Lock. See Power DoorLocks on page 1‑7.

H. AM-FM Radio on page 6‑11.Navigation System (If Equipped).See Navigation System Manual.

I. Cruise Control on page 8‑44.

J. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 5‑4 .

K. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 4‑6 .

L. Horn on page 4‑7.

M. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 4‑6 .

N. Ignition Positions on page 8‑28.

O. Climate Control Systems onpage 7‑1 or Automatic ClimateControl System on page 7‑3.

P. Shift Lever. See Shifting IntoPark on page 8‑32.

Q. Fuel Economy Mode onpage 8‑37 (If Equipped).

R. StabiliTrak System onpage 8‑43.

S. Cupholders on page 3‑1.

T. Power Outlets on page 4‑11.

U. CD Player on page 6‑19.

V. Driver Information CenterButtons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 4‑27.

W. Power Door Locks onpage 1‑7 . Hazard WarningFlashers on page 5‑2 . SafetyLocks on page 1‑7.

X. Glove Box on page 3‑1.


Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

The adjustment lever is located onthe left side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel up ordown and in or out to acomfortable position.

3. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.


b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicleswith an OnStar®, Bluetooth®,or navigation system, press tointeract with those systems. SeeOnStar® System on page 4‑44,Bluetooth (Overview) on page 6‑42or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)on page 6‑43 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 6‑46 orBluetooth (Navigation) onpage 6‑58, or the separatenavigation manual for moreinformation.

$ /c (Mute/End Call): Press tosilence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.For vehicles with OnStar orBluetooth systems, press to rejectan incoming call, or end acurrent call.

_ SRC ^ (Toggle Switch): Press toselect an audio source.

Toggle up or down to select the nextor previous favorite radio station orCD track, DVD, if equipped, track,or MP3 track.

+ x − (Volume): Press + toincrease the volume, press − todecrease the volume.

HornPress near the horn symbols orpress on the steering wheel pad tosound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the right side of thesteering column.

Move the lever to one of thefollowing positions:

8 (Mist): Single wipe, move thelever toz and then release. Thewipers stop after one wipe.

( (Off): Turns the wipers off.


& (Adjustable Interval Wipes):The time between wipes can beadjusted. Turn the& band up formore frequent wipes or down forless frequent wipes.

1 (Low Speed): Slow wipes.

2 (High Speed): Fast wipes.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 9‑29.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker willstop the motor until it cools down.

Windshield Washer

Pull the lever toward you to spraywasher fluid on the windshield. Thespray continues until the lever isreleased. The wipers will run a fewtimes. See Washer Fluid onpage 9‑22 for information on fillingthe windshield washer fluidreservoir.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Rear WindowWiper/WasherThe rear wiper controls are on theend of the windshield wiper lever.

Press the upper or lower portion ofthe button to control the rear wiperand rear wiper delay.


The system turns off when thebutton is returned to the middleposition.

Z (Rear Wiper): For continuousrear window wipes.

5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Sets adelay between wipes.

= (Rear Washer): Push thewindshield wiper lever forward tospray washer fluid on the rearwindow. The lever returns to itsstarting position when released.

The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and the rearwindow. Check the fluid level in thereservoir if either washer is notworking. See Washer Fluid onpage 9‑22.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,and vehicle speed information.

Avoid covering the GPS antenna forlong periods of time with objectsthat may interfere with the antenna'sability to receive a satellite signal.See Multi-Band Antenna onpage 6‑18 for the location of thevehicle's antennas. The compasssystem is designed to operate for acertain number of miles or degreesof turn before needing a signal fromthe GPS satellites. When thecompass display shows CAL, drivethe vehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine whenGPS signal is restored and providea heading again. See CompassMessages on page 4‑32 for moreinformation on the messages thatmay be displayed for the compass.


Clock (With Date Display)The infotainment system controls,located on the instrument panel, areused to access the time and datesettings through the menu system.See Operation on page 6‑7 forinformation about how to use themenu system.

Setting the Time and Date

1. Turn the infotainmentsystem ON.

2. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time and Date Settings.

3. Select Set Time or Set Date.

4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob toadjust the highlighted value.

5. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect the next value.

6. To save the time or dateand return to the Time andDate Settings menu, pressthe 0 BACK button at any timeor press the MENU/SEL knobafter adjusting the minutesor year.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format



3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

4. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

Setting the Month & DayFormat



3. Highlight Month & Day Format.

4. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect MM/DD (month/day) orDD/MM (day/month).

Setting the Auto Time Adjust



3. Highlight Auto Time Adjust.

4. Press the MENU/SEL knob toturn Auto Time Adjust on or off.

5. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect Time Zone, and thenselect the Time Zone.

6. Press the MENU/SEL knob toturn Daylight Savings on or off.


Clock (Without DateDisplay)The infotainment system controls,located on the instrument panel, areused to access the time and datesettings through the menu system.See Operation on page 6‑7 forinformation about how to use themenu system.

Setting the Time


2. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time Settings, or pressthe H button.

3. Select Set Time.

4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob toadjust the highlighted value.

5. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect the next value.

6. To save the time and return tothe Time Settings menu, pressthe 0 BACK button at any timeor press the SELECT buttonafter adjusting the minutes.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format


2. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time Settings, or pressthe H button.

3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

4. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to connect electricalequipment, such as a cellularphone.

There are four accessory poweroutlets in the following locations,below the CD slot, inside the centerconsole storage, on the rear of thecenter console storage, and in therear cargo compartment.


To use the outlets, remove thecover. Close the outlet cover, whennot in use.

Notice: If electrical devices areleft plugged into a power outlet,the battery may drain causing thevehicle not to start or damage tothe battery. This would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always unplug all electricaldevices when turning off thevehicle.

Certain electrical accessories maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlets and couldresult in blown vehicle or adapterfuses. If you experience a problem,see your dealer/retailer foradditional information on theaccessory power outlet.

Notice: Adding any electricalequipment to the vehicle candamage it or keep othercomponents from working asthey should. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not use equipmentexceeding maximum amperagerating of 20 amperes. Check withyour dealer/retailer before addingelectrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment.

Notice: Improper use of thepower outlet can cause damagenot covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not hang any type ofaccessory or accessory bracketfrom the plug because the poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only.

Warning Lights,Gages, and IndicatorsWarning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gages can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gages and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gagesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.


Instrument Cluster

US Version Shown, Canada Similar


SpeedometerThe vehicle's speed can be selectedto display on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) and the speedometerin either kilometers per hour (km/h)or miles per hour (mph). Telltales onthe speedometer indicate whetherkilometers or miles were chosen.The DIC will show the vehiclesspeed after the limit on thespeedometer has been reached.

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. If the vehicle needs anew odometer installed, the new

one is set to the mileage of the oldodometer. If this is not possible, it isset at zero and a label is put on thedriver's door to show the oldmileage reading.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Notice: If the engine is operatedwith the tachometer in the shadedwarning area, the vehicle couldbe damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Do not operatethe engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

Fuel Gage

United States Canada

When the ignition is on, the fuelgage shows about how much fuelthe vehicle has left in the fuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gage indicatesthe side of the vehicle the fuel dooris on.

The gage will first indicate emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel andthe low fuel light comes on, but thevehicle's fuel tank should befilled soon.


Here are some situations that canoccur with the fuel gage. None ofthese indicate a problem with thefuel gage.. At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gagereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gage indicated.For example, the gage may haveindicated the tank was half full,but it actually took a little moreor less than half the tank'scapacity to fill the tank.

. The gage moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gage takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gage


This gage measures thetemperature of the vehicle'sengine.

If the indicator needle moves to thehot side of the gage towards thecolored line, the engine is too hot.A temperature indicator light willturn on.

If the vehicle has been operatedunder normal driving conditions, andthe temperature indicator lightcomes on, pull off the road, stop thevehicle and turn off the engine assoon as possible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the engine is started this lightand a chime come on and stay onfor several seconds to reminddrivers to fasten their safety belts.The light also begins to flash.

This cycle repeats if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicleis moving.

If the driver safety belt is alreadybuckled, neither the light nor chimecome on.


Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

The passenger safety belt reminderlight is by the passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the engine is started this lightand the chime come on and stay onfor several seconds to remind thepassenger to fasten their safety belt.The light also begins to flash.

This cycle repeats if the passengerremains unbuckled and the vehicleis moving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor,the pretensioners, the airbagmodules, the wiring and the crashsensing and diagnostic module. Formore information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System onpage 2‑25.

The airbag readiness light comes onand stays on for several secondswhen the vehicle is started. Thenthe light turns off.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.


Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 2‑33 forimportant safety information. Theoverhead console has a passengerairbag status indicator.

United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several seconds

as a system check. If you are usingremote start to start the vehicle froma distance, if equipped, you may notsee the system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol to letyou know the status of the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passengerfrontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 4‑16 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.


Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.The light turns off when the engineis started. If it does not, havethe vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical charging

system. Have it checked by yourdealer/retailer. Driving while thislight is on could drain the battery.

When this light comes on, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) alsodisplays a message.

See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 4‑32.

This light and a Transport Mode Onmessage display when the vehicleis in Transport Mode. For moreinformation, see Key and LockMessages on page 4‑35.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It ensures thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment.

This light comes on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.


If the check engine light comes onand stays on, while the engine isrunning, this indicates that there isan OBD II problem and service isrequired.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, after a while, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle's fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modificationson page 9‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

The following can prevent moreserious damage to the vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to park thevehicle. Turn the key off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer/retailer for service assoon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.


An emission system malfunctionmight be corrected.. Make sure the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 8‑56. The diagnosticsystem can determine if thefuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. If the vehicle has been driventhrough a deep puddle of water,the vehicle's electrical systemmight be wet. The condition isusually corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A fewdriving trips should turn thelight off.

. Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of theseconditions occurs, change thefuel brand used. It will require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 8‑54.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer/retailercan check the vehicle. Thedealer/retailer has the proper testequipment and diagnostic tools tofix any mechanical or electricalproblems that might havedeveloped.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some state/provincial and localgovernments have or might beginprograms to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on the vehicle.Failure to pass this inspection couldprevent getting a vehicleregistration.

Here are some things to know tohelp the vehicle pass an inspection:. The vehicle will not pass this

inspection if the check enginelight is on with the enginerunning, or if the key is inON/RUN and the light is not on.


. The vehicle will not pass thisinspection if the OBD II(on-board diagnostic) systemdetermines that critical emissioncontrol systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. The vehicle would beconsidered not ready forinspection. This can happen ifthe battery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the vehiclefor inspection.

Brake System WarningLight


The brake indicator light shouldcome on briefly as the engine isstarted. If it does not come on havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light comes onwhen the parking brake is set. Thelight stays on if the parking brakedoes not fully release. If it stays onafter the parking brake is fullyreleased, there is a brake problem.Have the brake system inspectedimmediately.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

If the light comes on while driving, achime sounds. Pull off the road andstop. The pedal might be harder topush or go closer to the floor.It might also take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeDriving Characteristics and TowingTips on page 8‑58.


Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. A chime may also sound whenthe light comes on steady. Thenstart the engine again to reset thesystem. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. If the regularbrake system warning light is noton, the vehicle still has brakes, butnot antilock brakes. If the regularbrake system warning light is alsoon, the vehicle does not haveantilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Lighton page 4‑21.

For vehicles with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 4‑27 for all brake related DICmessages.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on if the TractionControl System (TCS) either has aproblem or is turned off. DICmessages appear in the DIC displayto help explain. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 4‑36for more information.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 8‑41 and StabiliTrakSystem on page 8‑43 for moreinformation.


StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If the Traction Control System (TCS)is off, wheel spin is not limited. If theStabiliTrak system is off, the systemdoes not assist in controlling thevehicle. Turn on the TCS and theStabiliTrak system and the warninglight turns off.

Check the DIC for applicablemessages. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 4‑36for more information.


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The StabiliTrak® system or theTraction Control System (TCS)indicator/warning light comes onbriefly while starting the engine.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer.If the system is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

The indicator/warning light flasheswhile the StabiliTrak or TCS systemis working to control the vehicle ona low traction surface.

If the TCS warning light comes onand stays on while driving, thevehicle needs service.

Check the Driver Information Center(DIC) for applicable messages. SeeRide Control System Messages onpage 4‑36 for more information.



Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with a tire pressuremonitoring system, this light comeson briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TirePressure Monitoring System.

When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message in theDriver Information Center (DIC), canaccompany the light. See TireMessages on page 4‑37 for moreinformation. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the tireloading information label. See TirePressure on page 9‑50 for moreinformation.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there may be aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System. The light flashesfor about a minute and stays onsteady for the remainder of theignition cycle. This sequencerepeats with every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 9‑53 for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.


The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on havethe vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer/retailer.

Fuel Economy Light

For vehicles with the fuel economymode light, it comes on when theeco (economy) switch, located onthe center console near the shifter,is pressed. For vehicles with aDriver Information Center (DIC) anECO Mode On message displays.See Fuel System Messages onpage 4‑35 for more information.Press the switch again to turn offthe light and exit the fuelsaver mode.

Low Fuel Warning Light

United States Shown, CanadaSimilar

This light comes on for afew seconds when the ignition isturned on as a check to indicate it isworking. If it does not come on,have it fixed.

The low fuel warning light is a circlelocated on the fuel gage. This lightcomes on and a chime soundsperiodically when the vehicle is lowon fuel. The light goes off when fuelis added to the fuel tank.

For vehicles with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), see FuelSystem Messages on page 4‑35for more information.


Security Light

This light comes on if there is aproblem with the security system,or if the vehicle has beentampered with.

For more information, see VehicleSecurity on page 1‑12.

High-Beam on Light

The high-beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 5‑2 for moreinformation.

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 5‑3 for moreinformation.


Lamps on Reminder

For vehicles with the lamps onreminder light, it comes on when thelights are in use.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is whitewhenever the cruise control is setand turns green when the cruisecontrol is active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is switched off. See CruiseControl on page 8‑44 for moreinformation.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The vehicle may have a DriverInformation Center (DIC). It displaysinformation about the vehicle andwarning messages if there is asystem problem detected. DICmessages display in the center ofthe instrument panel cluster. SeeVehicle Messages on page 4‑31 formore information.

The vehicle may also have featuresthat can be customized through thecontrols on the radio. See VehiclePersonalization on page 4‑39 formore information.


DIC Operation and Displays

Use the DIC buttons located inthe center of the instrument panelto access different displays. TheDIC displays trip, fuel, vehiclesystem information, and warningmessages. It also shows the shiftlever position, the odometer,and the direction the vehicle isdriving.

DIC Buttons

MENU: Press this button to get tothe Trip/Fuel Menu and the VehicleInformation Menu.

wx : Use these buttons to scrollthrough the items in each menu.A small marker will move along thepage as you scroll through theitems. This shows where each pageis in the menu.

V (Set/Clear): Use this button toset or clear the menu item when it isdisplayed.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

Press the MENU button untilTrip/Fuel Information Menu isdisplayed. Then pressx to scrollthrough the following menu items:. Trip 1. Trip 2. Fuel Range. Average Fuel Economy. Instantaneous Fuel Economy. Average Vehicle Speed. Timer. Digital Speedometer. Navigation Turn-by-Turn. Blank


Trip 1 and Trip 2

This display shows the currentdistance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe last reset for the trip odometer.The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing the trip reset stemor V while the trip odometer displayis showing.

Fuel Range

This display shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The fuel rangeestimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle's fuel economy overrecent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. Fuel range cannot be reset.

Average Fuel Economy

This display shows the approximateaverage liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles pergallon (mpg). This number iscalculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.The fuel economy can be reset bypressing V while the Average FuelEconomy display is showing.

Instantaneous Fuel Economy

This display shows the current fueleconomy in either liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This numberreflects only the fuel economy thatthe vehicle has right now andchanges frequently as drivingconditions change. Unlike averageeconomy, this display cannot bereset.

Average Vehicle Speed

This display shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value. The averagespeed can be reset by pressing Vwhile the Average Vehicle Speeddisplay is showing.

Timer

This display can be used as a timer.To start the timer, press V whileTimer is displayed. The display willshow the amount of time that haspassed since the timer was lastreset, not including time the ignitionis off. Time will continue to becounted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer willrecord up to 99 hours, 59 minutesand 59 seconds (99:59:59) afterwhich the display will return to zero.


To stop the timer, press V brieflywhile Timer is displayed. To resetthe timer to zero, press and hold V .

Digital Speedometer

The speedometer shows how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.

Turn-by-Turn

This display is used for the OnStaror Navigation System Turn-by-Turnguidance. See OnStar® System onpage 4‑44 or the Navigationmanual, if the vehicle hasnavigation, for more information.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

Press the MENU button until VehicleInformation Menu is displayed. Thenpressx to scroll through thefollowing menu items:. Unit. Tire Pressure. Remaining Oil Life. Blank

Unit

Press V to enter the unit menu.

Then pressw orx to switchbetween US or Metric when the Unitdisplay is active. Press V to confirmthe setting. This will change thedisplays on the cluster and DIC toeither metric or English (US)measurements.

Tire Pressure

The display will show a vehicle withthe approximate pressures of allfour tires. Tire pressure is displayedin either pounds per squareinch (psi) or in kilopascal (kPa).

Any time the tire pressures areadjusted the system needs torelearn the new pressures. Torelearn the tire pressures press Vwhile the Tire Pressure display isactive. The display will ask forconfirmation of a relearn. Pressworx to select Yes or No. Then

press V to confirm the selection.See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 9‑51 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 9‑53 formore information.


Remaining Oil Life

This display shows an estimate ofthe oil's remaining useful life.If “Remaining Oil Life 99%” isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the “Change Engine Oil Soon”message will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 4‑34. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 9‑10. Inaddition to the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule in thismanual. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 10‑2 formore information.

Remember, the Oil Life display mustbe reset after each oil change. It willnot reset itself. Also, be careful notto reset the Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, press V whilethe Oil Life display is active. Thedisplay will ask for confirmation of areset. Pressw orx to select Yes

or No. Then press V to confirm theselection. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 9‑12.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Compass

The vehicle may have a compass inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Compass on page 4‑9.

Vehicle MessagesMessages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the status ofthe vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed by thedriver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appear oneafter another.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you canpress V to acknowledge that youreceived the messages and to clearthem from the display. Somemessages cannot be cleared fromthe DIC display because they aremore urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can becleared. You should take anymessages that appear on thedisplay seriously and remember thatclearing the messages will onlymake the messages disappear, notcorrect the problem. You will find thepossible messages that can bedisplayed and some informationabout them grouped by subject inthe following information.


Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

Battery Saver Active

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing certainfeatures of the vehicle that you maybe able to notice. At the point thatfeatures are disabled, this messageis displayed. It means that thevehicle is trying to save the chargein the battery. Turn off unnecessaryaccessories to allow the battery torecharge.

Low Battery

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Batteryon page 9‑25 for more information.

Service Battery ChargingSystem

This message is displayed whenthere is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicle toyour dealer/retailer for service.

Brake System Messages

Brake Fluid Low

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low, see BrakeFluid on page 9‑24.

Release Parking Brake

This message is displayed as areminder that the parking brake ison. Release it before you attempt todrive.

Compass Messages

CAL

This message is displayed when thecompass needs to be calibrated.See Compass on page 4‑9.

– – –

Three dashes will be displayed if thecompass needs service. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

Cruise Control Messages

Apply Brakes Before Cruise

If this message displays whenattempting to activate cruise control,apply the brake and then try again.

Cruise Set to XXX

This message will display when thecruise control is set and it will showthe speed it was set to. See CruiseControl on page 8‑44 for moreinformation.


Door Ajar Messages

Door Open

A door open symbol will bedisplayed on the DIC showing whichdoor is open. If the vehicle has beenshifted out of P (Park), a “DoorOpen” message will also bedisplayed. Close the doorcompletely.

Hood Open

This message will display along witha hood open symbol when the hoodis open. Close the hood completely.

Manually Close the PowerLiftgate

This message will display if thepower liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle.After removing the obstructions, theliftgate will resume normal poweroperation.

Rear Access Open

This message will display along witha symbol when the liftgate is open.Close the liftgate completely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C Off Due to HighEngine Temp

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turns backon. You can continue to drive thevehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer/retailer as soon as possibleto avoid damage to the engine.

Coolant Level Low AddCoolant

This message will display if thecoolant is low, see Engine Coolanton page 9‑16.

Engine Overheated — IdleEngine

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

Engine Overheated — StopEngine

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.


High Coolant Temperature

This message displays if the coolanttemperature is hot, see EngineOverheating on page 9‑19.

Engine Oil Messages

Change Engine Oil Soon

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the Oil Life System.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 9‑12 and Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 4‑27 forinformation on how to reset thesystem. See Engine Oil onpage 9‑10 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 10‑2 formore information.

Engine Oil Hot, Idle Engine

This message displays when theengine oil temperature is too hot.Stop and allow the vehicle to idleuntil it cools down.

Engine Oil Low – Add Oil

This message displays when theengine oil level is too low. Check theoil level. See Engine Oil onpage 9‑10.

Oil Pressure Low – StopEngine

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer.

Engine Power Messages

Engine Power Is Reduced

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to yourdealer/retailer for service as soonas possible.


Fuel System Messages

ECO Mode On

On some models, this messagedisplays when the fuel economymode has been turned on bypressing the eco button near theshift lever. See Fuel Economy Modeon page 8‑37 for more information.

Fuel Level Low

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible.

Tighten Gas Cap

This message displays when thefuel cap is not on tight. Tighten thefuel cap.

Key and Lock Messages

Replace Battery In Remote Key

This message displays when thebattery in the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter needs to bereplaced.

Transport Mode On

This message displays when theignition is held in START for15 seconds. The battery light mayalso be flashing when this messageis displayed. To turn this messageoff, start the vehicle and hold thekey in the START position for15 seconds.

Object Detection SystemMessages

Park Assist Off

This message is displayed when thepark assist system has been turnedoff. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 8‑46.

Service Park Assist

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the park assistsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer for service.


Ride Control SystemMessages

All Wheel Drive Off

If your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays when the rear drive systemis overheating. This message turnsoff when the rear drive system coolsdown. If the warning message stayson for a while, you need to reset thewarning message. To reset thewarning message, turn the ignitionoff and then back on again. If themessage stays on, see your dealer/retailer right away. See All-WheelDrive on page 8‑38 for moreinformation.

Service All Wheel Drive

If your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays if a problem occurs withthis system. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the AWDsystem needs service. See yourdealer/retailer.

Service Traction Control

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). When thismessage is displayed, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See your dealer/retailer for service.

Service Stabilitrak

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak®

system. If this message appears, tryto reset the system. Stop; turn offthe engine for at least 15 seconds;then start the engine again. If thismessage still comes on, it meansthere is a problem. See yourdealer/retailer for service. Thevehicle is safe to drive, however,you do not have the benefit ofStabiliTrak, so reduce your speedand drive accordingly.

Stabilitrak Off

This message displays when theStabiliTrak system is turned off. SeeStabiliTrak System on page 8‑43for more information.


Traction Control Off

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

Traction Control On

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isfirst turned on. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 8‑41 formore information.

Airbag System Messages

Service Airbag

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the airbag system.Take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Safety Belt Messages

Buckle Seatbelt

This message displays as areminder when the safety belt is notbuckled.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages

Theft Attempted

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Service Vehicle Messages

Service AC System

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the air conditioningsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Service Power Steering

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the power steeringsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Service Vehicle Soon

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the vehicle. Take thevehicle to your dealer/retailer forservice.

Tire Messages

Service Tire Monitor System

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 9‑53 for more information.

Tire Learning Active

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 9‑53 for more information.

Tire Low Add Air To Tire

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low.

This message also displays “LeftFront”, “Right Front”, “Left Rear”,or “Right Rear” to indicate thelocation of the low tire.


The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 4‑24.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal to thevalues shown on the Tire LoadingInformation label. See Tires onpage 9‑43, Vehicle Load Limits onpage 8‑24, and Tire Pressure onpage 9‑50.

You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. Toread the other messages that mayhave been sent at the same time,press the set/reset button. The DICalso shows the tire pressure values.See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 4‑27.

Transmission Messages

Service Transmission

This message displays if there is aproblem with the transmission. Seeyour dealer/retailer.

Shift To Park

This message displays when thetransmission needs to be shifted toP (Park). This may appear whenattempting to remove the key fromthe ignition if the vehicle is not inP (Park).

Transmission Hot – IdleEngine

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

Ice Possible Drive With Care

This message is displayed when iceconditions are possible.

Turn Wiper Control toIntermittent First

This message is displayed whenattempting to adjust the intermittentwiper speed without intermittentselected on the wiper control. SeeWindshield Wiper/Washer onpage 4‑7 .


VehiclePersonalizationThe audio system controls are usedto access the personalizationmenus for customizing vehiclefeatures.

CONFIG (Configuration): Press toaccess the ConfigurationSettings Menu.

MENU / SELECT Knob: Press thecenter of this knob to enter themenus and select menu items. Turnthe knob to scroll through themenus.

0 BACK: Press to exit or movebackwards in a menu.

Entering the PersonalizationMenus

1. Turn the infotainment system onand press the CONFIG button toaccess the ConfigurationSettings menu.

2. Turn the MENU / SELECT knobto highlight Vehicle Settings.

3. Press the center of theMENU / SELECT knob to selectthe Vehicle Settings menu.

The following list of menu items willbe available:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Collision/Detection Systems. Languages. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Lock/Unlock/Start. Return to Factory Settings

Turn the MENU / SELECT knob tohighlight the menu. Press the knobto select it. Each of the menus isdetailed in the following information.All of the menus may not beavailable. Only those tied to thefeatures on your vehicle will beshown.

Climate and Air Quality

Select the Climate and Air Qualitymenu and the following will bedisplayed:. Auto Fan Speed. Air Conditioning Mode. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

Auto Fan Speed

This selection is available onvehicles with the Automatic ClimateControl System. Choose from thefollowing blower speed settings:

High: Increased speed.

Low: Reduced speed.

Normal: Moderate speed.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen “Auto Fan Speed” ishighlighted. Turn the knob tohighlight “High”, “Normal”, or “Low”.Press the knob to confirm theselection and go back to thelast menu.


Air Conditioning Mode

This will allow you to select whetheror not the air conditioning comes onautomatically the next time thevehicle is started. “On” means thatthe air conditioning will be on atstart up, regardless of whether itwas on or off the last time thevehicle was turned off. “Off” meansthe air conditioning will be off at thenext start up, regardless of whetherit was on or off the last time thevehicle was turned off. “LastSetting” means that the when thevehicle is started the air conditioningwill resume whichever setting it wasat the last time the vehicle wasturned off.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen “Air Conditioning Mode” ishighlighted. Turn the knob tohighlight “On”, “Off”, or “LastSetting”. Press the knob to confirmyour selection and go back to thelast menu.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

When on, this feature will turn theheated seats on when using remotestart on cold days.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen “Remote Start AutoHeat Seats” is highlighted totoggle between “On” or “Off”.Press 0 BACK to confirm theselection and go back to thelast menu.

Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Easy Exit Driver Seat. Chime Volume. Reverse Tilt Mirror

Easy Exit Driver Seat

This allows you to turn the easy exitseat feature on or off.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen “Easy Exit Driver Seat” ishighlighted. Turn the knob to select“On” or “Off”. Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen “Chime Volume” ishighlighted. Turn the knob to select“Normal” or “High”. Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.


Reverse Tilt Mirror

This allows you to turn the park tiltmirrors feature on or off.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen “Reverse Tilt Mirror” ishighlighted. Turn the knob to select“On” or “Off”. Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Collision/Detection Systems

Select the Collision/DetectionSystems menu and the following willbe displayed:. Park Assist

Park Assist

This allows the Ultrasonic ParkingAssist feature to be turned on or off.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen “Park Assist” is highlighted.Turn the knob to select “On”, “Off”,or “Tow Bar”. Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Languages

Select the Language menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. English. French. Spanish

Turn the MENU / SELECT knob toselect the language. Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Vehicle Locator Lights. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This allows the vehicle locator lightsto be turned on or off.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen “Vehicle Locator Lights” ishighlighted to toggle between “On”

or “Off”. Press 0 BACK to confirmthe selection and go back to thelast menu.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen “Exit Lighting” is highlighted.Turn the knob to select “Off”,“30 Seconds”, “1 Minute”,or “2 Minutes”. Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.


Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing will be displayed:. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out. Auto Door Unlock. Delayed Door Lock

Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

When on, this feature will keep thedriver's door from locking when thedoor is open. If off is selected, theDelayed Door Lock menu will beavailable.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen “Unlocked Door AntiLock Out” is highlighted totoggle between “On” or “Off”.Press 0 BACK to confirm theselection and go back to thelast menu.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen “Auto Door Unlock” ishighlighted. Turn the knob to select“All Doors”, “Driver Door”, or “Off”.Press the knob to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. If you want tooverride the delay you can press thepower door lock on the instrumentpanel.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen “Delayed Door Lock” ishighlighted. Turn the knob to select“On” or “Off”. Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Remote Lock/Unlock/Start

Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Startand the following will be displayed:. Remote Unlock Light Feedback. Remote Lock Feedback. Remote Door Unlock. Memory Remote Recall. Remote Vehicle Start

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen “Remote Unlock LightFeedback” is highlighted. Turn theknob to select “Flash Lights” or“Off”. Press the knob to confirm andgo back to the last menu.


Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when unlockingthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen “Remote Lock Feedback” ishighlighted. Turn the knob to select“Lights and Horn”, “Lights Only”,“Horn Only”, or “Off”. Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen “Remote Door Unlock” ishighlighted. Turn the knob to select“All Doors” or “Driver Door”. Pressthe knob to confirm and go back tothe last menu.

Memory Remote Recall

This allows the “Memory RemoteRecall” feature to be turned on oroff. “Memory Remote Recall” iswhen the memorized settings will berecalled as you unlock the vehicle.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen “Memory Remote Recall” ishighlighted to toggle between “On”


Remote Vehicle Start

This allows the “Remote VehicleStart” to be turned on or off, if thevehicle has this feature.

Press the MENU / SELECT knobwhen “Remote Vehicle Start” ishighlighted to toggle between “On”


Return to Factory Settings

Select “Return to Factory Settings”to return all of the vehiclepersonalization to the defaultsettings. Turn the knob to select“Yes” or “No”. Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.


OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovativetechnologies and live advisors toprovide a wide range of safety,security, navigation, diagnostics,and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built in sensors canautomatically alert an OnStaradvisor who is immediatelyconnected to the vehicle to see ifyou need help.

How OnStar Service Works

Q : This blue button connects youto a specially trained OnStar advisorto verify your account informationand to answer questions.

] : Push this red emergencybutton to get priority help fromspecially trained OnStar emergencyadvisors.

X : Push this button for hands‐free,voice‐activated calling and to givevoice commands for turn‐by‐turnnavigation.

Crisis Assist, Stolen VehicleAssistance, Vehicle Diagnostics,Remote Door Unlock, RoadsideAssistance, Turn‐by‐Turn Navigationand Hands‐Free Calling areavailable on most vehicles. Not allOnStar services are available on allvehicles. For more information seethe OnStar Owner's Guide or visitwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or

TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080, or pressQ tospeak with an OnStar advisor24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

For a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations, seethe OnStar Owner's Guide in theglove box.

OnStar service is subject to theOnStar terms and conditionsincluded in the OnStar SubscriberInformation.

OnStar service cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area. OnStar service alsocannot work unless the vehicle is ina place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar has hired for thatarea has coverage, networkcapacity and reception when theservice is needed, and technologythat is compatible with the OnStarservice. Not all services areavailable everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at alltimes.


The OnStar system can record andtransmit vehicle information. Thisinformation is automatically sent toan OnStar call center whenQ is

pressed,] is pressed, or if theairbags or ACR system deploy. Thisinformation usually includes thevehicle's GPS location and, in theevent of a crash, additionalinformation regarding the crash thatthe vehicle was involved in (e.g. thedirection from which the vehicle washit). When the virtual advisor featureof OnStar hands-free calling isused, the vehicle also sends OnStarthe vehicle's GPS location so theycan provide services where it islocated.

Location information about thevehicle is only available if the GPSsatellite signals are unobstructedand available.

The vehicle must have a workingelectrical system, includingadequate battery power, for theOnStar equipment to operate. Thereare other problems OnStar cannotcontrol that may prevent OnStarfrom providing OnStar service atany particular time or place. Someexamples are damage to importantparts of the vehicle in a crash, hills,tall buildings, tunnels, weather orwireless phone network congestion.

OnStar Steering WheelControls

This vehicle may have a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used to interactwith OnStar hands-free calling. SeeSteering Wheel Controls onpage 4‑6 for more information.

On some vehicles, the mute buttoncan be used to dial numbers intovoice mail systems, or to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide for more information.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar advisor cannot be heard.

If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system may notbe functioning properly. PressQand request a vehicle diagnostic.If the light appears clear (no light isappearing), your OnStarsubscription has expired and allservices have been deactivated.PressQ to confirm that the OnStarequipment is active.


2 NOTES

Lighting 5-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 5-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 5-2Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is locatedon the turn signal/lane change lever.

O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turnto operate the exterior lamps.

O (Off): Turns the exteriorlamps off.

AUTO (Automatic Headlamps):Turns the exterior lamps on and offautomatically depending on theexterior light.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps together with thefollowing:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

5 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

5-2 Lighting

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 Headlamp High/Low BeamChanger: Push the turn/lanechange lever away from you to turnthe high beams on.

Pull the lever towards you to returnto low beams.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassThe flash‐to‐pass feature works withthe low‐beams or Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) on or off.

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal/lane change lever all theway towards you. Then release it.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)system makes the low-beamheadlamps come on at a reducedbrightness in daylight when thefollowing conditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamp band is in the

automatic position.. The transmission is not in

P (Park).. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.. The parking brake is released.

Fully functional Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) are required on allvehicles first sold in Canada.

When the DRL are on the taillamps,sidemarker, instrument panel lightsand other lamps will not be on. Theinstrument panel cluster will be lit.

When the exterior lamp band isturned to the headlamp position, thelow-beam headlamps come on. Theother lamps that come on with theheadlamps will also come on.

To idle your vehicle with the DRLoff, move the shift lever to P (Park).The DRL will stay off until the shiftlever is moved out of the P (Park)position.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Hazard Warning Flashers| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press this button, located on thecenter of the instrument panel, tomake the front and rear turn signallamps flash on and off. This warnsothers that you are having trouble.

Press| again to turn theflashers off.

Lighting 5-3

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster will flash in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is complete.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a signal bulb maybe burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse,see Fuses on page 9‑37 for moreinformation.

Fog LampsFor vehicles with fog lamps, thecontrol is located on the turn signal/lane change lever.

Use the fog lamps for better visionin foggy or misty conditions.

# (Fog Lamps): Turn the fog lampband on the lever to # and releaseit, to turn the fog lamps on or off.The band will return to its originalposition.

The parking lamps or low‐beamheadlamps must be on to use thefog lamps.

The fog lamps will go off wheneverthe high-beam headlamps areturned on. When the high‐beamheadlamps are turned off, the foglamps will come on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

5-4 Lighting

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlThis control is located on theinstrument panel, to the left of thesteering column.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to brighten or dimthe lights.

Dome LampsThe dome lamp controls are locatedin the overhead console. To changethe settings, press the following:

* (Dome Lamp Override): Turnsthe lamp off, even when a dooris open.

1 (Door): The lamp comes onautomatically when a door isopened.

+ (On): Turns the dome lamp on.

Reading LampsThe reading lamps are located onthe overhead console. These lampscome on automatically when anydoor is opened.

For manual operation, press thebutton next to each lamp to turn iton or off.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe dome lamp, cargo lamp andfoot lamp inside the vehicle comeon when any door is opened, if thedome lamp is in the door position. Inaddition, these lamps come onwhen the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) unlock button is pressed.They stay on for 20 seconds or untila door is opened. After the door isopened and then closed, the lightremains on for 20 seconds, or untilthe ignition is turned to ON/RUN.

Infotainment System 6-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 6-2Overview (Radio with CD) . . . . . 6-3Overview (Radio withCD/DVD/MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21Mass StorageMedia (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

Auxiliary Devices(Radio with CD) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

Auxiliary Devices (Radio withCD/DVD/MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

Rear Seat InfotainmentRear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33

PhoneBluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 6-42Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46

Bluetooth (Navigation) . . . . . . . 6-58

IntroductionRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the roadfor extended periods could causea crash resulting in injury ordeath to you or others. Do notgive extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

6-2 Infotainment System

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 8‑3.

This vehicle's infotainment systemmay be equipped with a noisereduction system which can workimproperly if the audio amplifier,engine calibrations, exhaust system,microphones, radio, or speakers aremodified or replaced. This couldresult in more noticeable enginenoise at certain speeds.

Notice: Contact yourdealer/retailer before addingany equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the vehicle'sengine, radio, or other systems,and could damage them. Followfederal rules covering mobileradio and telephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 8‑29 for moreinformation.

Navigation/Radio System

For vehicles with a navigation radiosystem, see the separate NavigationSystem manual.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature worksby learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) tothe infotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved toa different vehicle.


Overview (Radio with CD) A. VOL/O. Turns the system on or off

and adjusts the volume.

B. g SEEK

. Radio: Seeks the previousstation.

. CD: Selects the previoustrack or rewinds within atrack.

C. RADIO/BAND. Changes the band while

listening to the radio.. Selects the radio when

listening to a different audiosource.

D. AUX. Selects a connected

external audio source.

E. Buttons 1 to 6. Radio: Saves and selects

favorite stations.


F. FAV. Radio: Opens the

favorites list.

G. TONE. Opens the tone menu.

H. CONFIG. Opens the settings menu.

I. MENU/SEL. Press: Opens the menus

and selects menu items.. Turn: Highlights menu items

or sets values while in amenu. Manually selectsradio stations whilelistening to the radio.

J. CD Slot. Insert a CD.

K. k. CD: Pauses the CD.

L. CD. Selects the CD player when


M. Z CD Eject

. Removes a disc from theCD slot.

N. l SEEK

. Radio: Seeks the nextstation.

. CD: Selects the next trackor fast forwards within atrack.

O. INFO. Radio: Shows available

information about thecurrent station.

. CD: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.

P. 5 / 0

. Opens the phonemain menu.

. Mutes the audio system.

Q. H. Opens the clock menu.

R. 0 BACK

. Menu: Moves onelevel back.

. Character Input: Deletesthe last character.


Overview (Radio with CD/DVD/MEM) A. VOL/O. Turns the system on or off

and adjusts the volume.

B. g SEEK

. Radio: Seeks the previousstation.

. CD/DVD: Selects theprevious track or rewindswithin a track.

. MEM: Selects the previoustrack or rewinds within atrack.

C. RADIO/BAND. Changes the band while

listening to the radio.. Selects the radio when


D. MEM/DVD/AUX. Selects MEM, CD/DVD,

USB, or a connected frontor rear auxillary audiosource.


E. Buttons 1 to 6. Radio: Saves and selects

favorite stations.. MEM: Saves and selects

favorite tracks and playlists.

F. FAV. Radio: Opens the

favorites list.. MEM: Opens the

favorites list.

G. TONE. Opens the tone menu.

H. CONFIG. Opens the settings menu.

I. MENU/SEL. Press: Opens menus and

selects menu items.. Turn: Highlights menu

items or sets valueswhile in a menu. Manuallyselects radio stations whilelistening to the radio.

J. CD/DVD Slot. Insert a disc.

K. k (Play/Pause)

. Radio: Pauses time shiftedcontent.

. CD/DVD: PausesCD/DVD‐A and DVD‐Vplayback. Stops DVD‐Vplayback.

. MEM: Pauses MEMplayback.

L. O REC

. CD/DVD: Records contentfrom audio CDs andMP3/WMA CDs.

. AUX: Records content fromUSB mass storage devices.

M. Z CD Eject

. Removes a disc from theCD/DVD slot.

N. l SEEK

. Radio: Seeks the nextstation.

. CD/DVD: Selects the nexttrack or fast forwards withina track.

. MEM: Selects the nexttrack or fast forwards withina track.

O. INFO. Radio: Shows available

information about thecurrent station.

. CD/DVD: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.

. MEM: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.

P. 5 / 0 (Phone/Mute)

. Opens the phonemain menu.

. Mutes the audio system.


Q. DEL. MEM: Deletes the current

track from MEM.

R. 0 BACK

. Menu: Moves onelevel back.

. Character Input: Deletesthe last character.

Operation

Controls

The infotainment system isoperated by using the pushbuttons,multifunction knobs, menus that areshown on the display, and steeringwheel controls, if equipped.

Turning the System On or Off

VOL/O (Volume/Power): Press toturn the system on and off.

Automatic Switch‐Off

If the infotainment system hasbeen turned on after the ignition isturned off, the system will turn offautomatically after ten minutes.

Volume Control

VOL/O (Volume/Power): Turn toadjust the volume.

5 / 0 (Mute): For vehicles withOnStar®, press and hold 5 / 0 tomute the infotainment system.Press and hold 5 / 0 again, or turn

the VOL/O knob to cancel mute.

For vehicles without OnStar®,press 5 / 0 to mute the

infotainment system. Press 5 / 0

again, or turn the VOL/ O knob tocancel mute.

Menu System

Controls

The MENU/SEL knob and the0 BACK button are used tonavigate the menu system.

MENU/SEL (Menu/Select):Press to:. Enter the menu system.. Select or activate the highlighted

menu option.. Confirm a set value.. Turn a system setting on or off.

Turn to:. Highlight a menu option.. Select a value.

0 BACK: Press to:. Exit a menu.. Return from a submenu screen

to the previous menu screen.. Delete the last character in a

sequence.


Selecting a Menu Option

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tomove the highlighted bar.

2. Press the MENU/SEL button toselect the highlighted option.

Submenus

An arrow on the right‐hand edge ofthe menu indicates that it has asubmenu with other options.

Activating a Setting

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight the setting.

2. Press the MENU/SEL button toactivate the setting.

Setting a Value

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tochange the current value of thesetting.

2. Press the MENU/SEL button toconfirm the setting.

Turning a Function On or Off

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight the function.

2. Press the MENU/SEL button toturn the function on or off.

Entering a Character Sequence

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight the character.

2. Press the MENU/SEL button toselect the character.


Press the 0 BACK button to deletethe last character in the sequenceor press and hold to delete theentire character sequence.

Audio Settings

The audio settings can be set foreach radio band and each audioplayer source.

To quickly reset an audio settingvalue to 0:

1. Press the TONE button.

2. Select the audio setting.

3. Press and hold the MENU/SELbutton until the valuechanges to 0.

Press the 0 BACK button to goback to the Tone Settings menu.

Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,and Bass


2. Select Treble, Midrange,or Bass.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the Fader and Balance


2. Select Fader or Balance.

3. Select the value.



Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)

For vehicles that have an equalizer:


2. Select EQ.

3. Select the setting.


System Settings

Configuring the Number ofFavorite Pages

To configure the number of availablefavorite pages:

1. Press the CONFIG button.

2. Select Radio Settings.

3. Select Radio Favorites.

4. Select the number of availablefavorite pages.

5. Press the 0 BACK buttonto go back to the SystemConfiguration menu.

Auto Volume

The auto volume featureautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.

The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the auto volumefeature can be turned off.



3. Select Auto Volume.




Maximum Startup Volume

The maximum volume played whenthe Radio with CD is first turned oncan be set.



3. Select Maximum StartupVolume.



Radio

AM-FM Radio

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theradio are:

RADIO/BAND: Press to turn theradio on and choose between AM,FM, and XM™, if equipped.

MENU/SEL: Turn to manuallysearch for stations.

FAV: Press to open thefavorites list.

l SEEK org SEEK: Press tosearch for stations. Press and holdto fast forward and rewind timeshifted data. See “Time Shifting(Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)”later in this section.

k : Press to pause and resumetime shifted data. See “Time Shifting(Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)”later in this section.

1 to 6: Press to select presetstations.

RDS (Radio Data System)

The radio may have RDS. The RDSfeature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This feature only workswhen the information from the radiostation is available. In rare cases,a radio station could broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.

While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters display.


Radio Menus

Radio menus are available for AMand FM.

Press the MENU/SEL knob to openthe main radio menu for that band.

Selecting a Band

Press the RADIO/BAND buttonto choose AM, FM, or XM™,if equipped. The last station thatwas playing starts playing again.

Selecting a Station

Seek Tuning (Radio with CD)

If the radio station is not known:

Briefly pressg SEEK orl SEEK,to automatically search for the nextavailable station. If a station is notfound, the radio switches to a moresensitive search level. If a stationstill is not found, the frequency thatwas last active begins to play.

If the radio station is known:

Press and holdg SEEK orl SEEK until the station on thedisplay is reached, then release thebutton.

Seek Tuning (Radio with CD/DVDand MEM)

Briefly pressl SEEK org SEEK,to automatically search for the nextavailable station. If a station is notfound, the radio switches to a moresensitive search level. If a stationstill is not found, the frequency thatwas last active begins to play.

Manual Tuning

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to selectthe frequency on the display.

Favorites List

1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.

2. Select Favorites List.

3. Select the station.

Station Lists


2. Select AM or FM Station List. Allreceivable stations in the currentreception area are displayed. If astation list has not been created,an automatic station searchis done.


Category Lists

Most stations that broadcast anRDS program type code specify thetype of programming transmitted.Some stations change the programtype code depending on thecontent. The system stores the RDSstations sorted by program type inthe FM category list.

To search for a programming typedetermined by station:


2. Select FM category list. A list ofall programming types availabledisplays.


3. Select the programming type.A list of stations that transmitprogramming of the selectedtype displays.


The category lists are updatedwhen the station lists areupdated.

Updating Station & Category Lists

If stations stored in the station listcan no longer be received.


2. Select Update AM or FM StationList, if the stations stored inthe station list are no longerreceived. A station search will becompleted and the first station inthe updated list will play.

To cancel the station search, pressthe MENU/SEL knob.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

Stations from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six stations can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingbutton 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.

Retrieving stations

Press the FAV button to open afavorite page or to switch to anotherfavorite page. Briefly press one ofthe 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve thestation.

Time Shifting (Radio withCD/DVD and MEM)

The radio with MEM time shiftfeature can rewind 20 minutes ofFM/AM content. While listening tothe radio, the content from thecurrent station is always beingbuffered.

Press thek button to pause theradio. The radio displays the timeshift status bar. The status barshows the amount of content thatis stored in the buffer and thecurrent pause point.

To resume playback from thecurrent pause point, press thek button again. The radio is nolonger live, but played from the timeshift buffer. A status bar displaysbelow the station number.

Press and hold theg SEEK orl SEEK buttons to fast forward orrewind through the time shift buffer.Holdl SEEK until the end of therecorded buffer resumes liveplayback.


Press and release theg SEEK orl SEEK buttons to jump forward orback 30 seconds in the time shiftbuffer.

When the radio station is changed,the buffer is cleared andautomatically restarted for thecurrent station. Content from apreviously tuned station is no longeravailable.

The time shift feature is notavailable while recording or withother sources of playback.

Pausing AM/FM with the VehicleTurned Off

If AM/FM is paused when thevehicle is turned off, the radiocontinues to buffer the current radiostation for up to 20 minutes. If thevehicle is turned back on within20 minutes, the radio resumesplayback from the paused point.

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid XM SatelliteRadio subscription can receive XMprogramming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service thatis based in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM Satellite Radio hasa wide variety of programmingand commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. A service fee is required toreceive the XM service. For moreinformation, contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control the XMradio are:

RADIO/BAND: Press to turn theradio on and choose between AM,FM, and XM™, if equipped.

g SEEK /l SEEK: Press to goto the previous or next station.

FAV: Press to open thefavorites list.

k : Press to pause and resumetime shifted data. See “Time Shifting(Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)”later in this section.

1 to 6: Press to select presetstations.

MENU/SEL: Turn to select stations.Press to open the XM SatelliteRadio menu.


Selecting the XM Band

Press the RADIO/BAND button tochoose between the AM, FM andXM bands. The last channel playedin that band begins to play whenthat band is selected.

XM Categories

XM channels are organized incategories.

Removing or Adding Categories

Channels in a category that havebeen removed can still be accessedby using theg SEEK orl SEEKbuttons, or the MENU/SEL knob.

To add or remove categories:



3. Select XM Categories.

4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight the category.

5. Press the MENU/SEL knob toremove or add the category.

Selecting an XM Channel

XM channels can be selected byusingg SEEK,l SEEK, theMENU/SEL knob, or the menusystem.

Selecting a Channel Using

g SEEK orl SEEK(Radio with CD)

. Press and releaseg SEEK orl SEEK to go to the previousor next channel.

. Press and holdg SEEK orl SEEK to scroll through theprevious or next channel untilthe channel is reached.

Selecting a Channel Using

g SEEK orl SEEK (Radio withCD/DVD and MEM)

Press and releaseg SEEK orl SEEK to go to the previous ornext channel.

Selecting a Channel Using theMENU/SEL Knob

To select an XM channel using theMENU/SEL knob:

Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight an XM channel, thechannel is selected after a shortdelay.

To select a channel using the menu:

1. Turn the menu knob and selectChannel List.

2. Select the desired channel.

Selecting a Channel Using theMenu System

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.

2. Select XM Category List.

3. Select the category.

4. Select the channel.


Storing an XM Channel as aFavorite

Channels from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six channels can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.

Storing a Channel as a Favorite

To store the channel to a positionin the list, press and hold thecorresponding 1 to 6 button untilthe channel can be heard again.

Retrieving Channels

Press the FAV button to open afavorite page or to change toanother favorite page. Briefly pressone of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrievethe channel.

Time Shifting (Radio withCD/DVD and MEM)

The radio with MEM time shiftfeature can rewind 20 minutes ofXM content. While listening to theradio, the content from the currentchannel is always being buffered.

Press thek button to pause theradio. The radio displays the timeshift status bar. The status barshows the amount of content that isstored in the buffer and the currentpause point.

To resume playback from thecurrent pause point, press thek button again. The radio is nolonger live, but played from the timeshift buffer. A status bar displaysbelow the channel number.

Press and hold theg SEEK orl SEEK buttons to fast forward orrewind through the time shift buffer.Holdl SEEK until the end of therecorded buffer resumes liveplayback.

Press and release theg SEEK orl SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous song in the time shiftbuffer.

When the channel is changed, thebuffer is cleared and automaticallyrestarted for the current channel.Content from a previously tunedstation is no longer available.

The time shift feature is notavailable while recording or withother sources of playback.

Pausing XM with the VehicleTurned Off

If XM is paused when the vehicle isturned off, the radio continues tobuffer the current radio station forup to 20 minutes. If the vehicle isturned back on within 20 minutes,the radio resumes playback from thepaused point.


XM Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked by request,by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated, noaction is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data, no action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavailable: Thispreviously assigned channel is nolonger assigned. Tune to anotherstation.

No Artist Info: The systemis working properly. No artistinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No Title Info: The system isworking properly. No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No CAT Info: The system isworking properly. No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No Information: The systemis working properly. No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel.

No XM Signal: The system isworking properly. The vehicle maybe in a location where the XM signalis being blocked. When the vehicleis moved into an open area, thesignal should return.

CAT Not Found: The system isworking properly. There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with theXM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Check Antenna: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.


Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. Static can occur whenthings like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. Whenthis happens, try reducing the trebleon the radio.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception fromcoast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Justas with FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage can causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.

Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is locatedon the roof of the vehicle. Theantenna is used for the AM/FMradio, OnStar, the XM SatelliteRadio Service System, and GPS(Global Positioning System); if thevehicle has these features. Keepthe antenna clear of obstructions forclear reception. If the vehicle hasa sunroof and it is open, theperformance of the AM/FM radio,OnStar, XM system, and GPS canbe affected.


Audio Players

CD PlayerThe CD player can play audio CDsand MP3 CDs.

The CD player will not play8 cm (3 in.) CDs.

Care of CDs

Sound quality can be reduced dueto disc quality, recording method,quality of the music recorded, andhow the disc has been handled.Handle discs carefully and storethem in their original cases or otherprotective cases away from directsunlight and dust. If the bottomsurface of a disc is damaged, thedisc may not play properly or at all.Do not touch the bottom surface ofa disc while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up discsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the bottom surface of a disc isdirty, take a soft lint free cloth,or dampen a clean soft cloth in amild neutral detergent solutionmixed with water, and clean it.Wipe the disc from the center tothe outer edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add a label to a disc, as itcould get caught in the CD player.If a label is needed, label the topof the recorded disc with amarking pen.

Do not use disc lens cleanersbecause they could contaminate thelens of the disc optics and damagethe CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.

While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CDat a time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control the CDplayer are:

CD: Press to choose between theCD and AUX player.

l SEEK org SEEK : Press toselect tracks or to fast forward orrewind within a track.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the CD that maybe available.

MENU/SEL: Turn to select tracks.

Z (Eject): Press to removethe CD.

k : Press to pause a CD or MP3track, press again to resumeplayback.


Inserting a CD

With the printed side facing up,insert a disc into the CD slot until itis drawn in.

Removing a CD

Press theZ button.

The disc is pushed out of theCD slot.

If the disc is not removed after it isejected, it is pulled back in after afew seconds.

Playing a CD or MP3 CD

Press the CD button, if there is adisc in the player it begins playing.

Information about the disc andcurrent track is shown on thedisplay depending on the datastored.

Selecting a CD Track

Using the control buttons:

. Press theg SEEK orl SEEKbutton to select the previous ornext track.

. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Tracks list.

3. Select the track.

Playing Tracks in Random Order

Press the MENU/SEL knob andthen set Shuffle Songs to On.

Fast Forward and Rewind

Press and holdl SEEK org SEEK to fast forward or rewindwithin the current track.

Selecting an MP3 Track




Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Playlists / Folders.

3. Select the playlist or folder.



Searching for MP3 Tracks

The search feature may take sometime to display the information afterreading the disc due to the amountof information stored on the disc.FM automatically plays while thedisc is being read.

Tracks can be searched by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Folder View

To search for tracks:


2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


CD/DVD PlayerThe CD/DVD player can playCDs, DVD‐As, MP3/WMA CDs,MP3/WMA DVDs, and DVD‐Vs.

The CD/DVD player will not play8 cm (3 in.) discs.

Care of CDs and DVDs

Sound quality can be reduced dueto disc quality, recording method,quality of the music recorded, andhow the disc has been handled.Handle discs carefully and storethem in their original cases or otherprotective cases away from directsunlight and dust. If the bottomsurface of a disc is damaged, thedisc may not play properly or at all.Do not touch the bottom surface ofa disc while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up discsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the bottom surface of a disc isdirty, take a soft lint free cloth,or dampen a clean soft cloth in amild neutral detergent solution

mixed with water, and clean it. Wipethe disc from the center to theouter edge.

Care of the CD/DVD Player

Do not add a label to a disc, as itcould get caught in the CD/DVDplayer. If a label is needed, labelthe top of the recorded disc with amarking pen.

Do not use disc lens cleanersbecause they could contaminate thelens of the disc optics and damagethe CD/DVD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD ata time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.


Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theCD/DVD player are:

MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to choosebetween the MEM, CD/DVD,and AUX.


INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the disc that maybe available.


Z (Eject): Press to removea disc.

k : Press to pause a CD, DVD‐A,or DVD‐V, press again to resumeplayback. Press and hold to stop aDVD‐V disc.

Inserting a CD or DVD

With the printed side facing up,insert a disc into the slot until it isdrawn in.

Removing a CD or DVD

Press theZ button.

The disc is pushed out of theCD/DVD slot.

If the disc is not removed after it isejected, it is pulled back in after afew seconds.

Playing a CD or DVD‐A Disc

Press the MEM/DVD/AUX buttonif there is a disc in the player, itbegins playing.

Information about the disc andcurrent track is shown on thedisplay depending on the datastored.

Selecting CD or DVD‐A Tracks




Using the menu:


2. Select Tracks List.


Pausing a CD or DVD‐A Track

Press thek button to pause a CD

or DVD‐A track. Press thek buttonagain to continue playing the track.

Playing CD or DVD‐A Tracks inRandom Order


Fast Forward and Rewind

Press and hold thel SEEK org SEEK button to fast forward orrewind within the current track.


Playing an MP3 CD or DVD

Files that are not stored in foldersare displayed in the rootdirectory (disc).

The search rate increases if theMENU/SEL knob is continuouslyturned while searching in a list.

Selecting an MP3 Track




Using the CD or DVD Menu:


2. Select Folder List.

3. Select the folder.


Searching for MP3s on a CDor DVD

It is normal for the search featureto take some time to display theinformation after reading the discdue to the amount of informationstored on the disc. The infotainmentsystem automatically switches toFM while the disc is being read.

Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag displayas Unknown.

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres

The number of objects in eachcategory is shown in parenthesesafter the category.



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, or Genres.

4. Select the track. The searchrate increases if the menuMENU/SEL knob is continuouslyturned while searching in a list.

Playing MP3 Tracks in RandomOrder


Recording an Audio or MP3CD to MEM

See Mass Storage Media (MEM) onpage 6‑25 for more information.


Playing a DVD‐V

See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 6‑33 forinformation about how to control aVideo DVD using the wirelessremote control.

Selecting a Chapter




Using DVD Menu:


2. Select Chapter List.

3. Select the chapter.

Selecting a Title


2. Select Title List.

3. Select the title.

Changing the Audio Stream


2. Select Audio Stream.

3. Select Change Audio Stream.

4. Press MENU/SEL to change theselection.

Select Cancel to exit the menu.

Pausing a DVD


2. Select Pause, to pause thedisc. Select Unpause to startplayback.

Navigating the DVD‐V Disc Menu

Use the following actions tonavigate the title menu on aDVD‐V Disc.. Select / Enter. Cursor UP. Cursor DOWN

. Cursor RIGHT

. Cursor LEFT

. Up Menu

Use the following actions tonavigate the menu on a DVD‐VDisc while playing chapters.. Pause (Play). Chapter List. Title List. DVD/DVD. DVD/AUX. AUX/DVD. AUX/AUX

To navigate the menu:


2. Select the action.


Mass StorageMedia (MEM)Infotainment systems with MEMstorage are able to record up to1.1 GB (gigabyte) of music fromAudio CDs, MP3/WMA/AAC discs,and USB storage devices. The MEMplayer can also time shift audio fromAM, FM, and XM™ radio.

Music or content that is storedin MEM that you did not create,or have the right to distribute, mustbe deleted before the sale or end ofthe lease of the vehicle.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theMEM player are:

MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to selectthe MEM player.


INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the MEM trackthat may be available.

k : Press to pause the trackcurrently playing, press again toresume playback.

O REC: Press to record musicfrom a CD, DVD-A, or USB drive.

FAV (Favorites): Press to displayMEM favorites.

1‐6: Press to select a track or astored playlist.


Recording From Audio CDs

The infotainment system can recordthe current song playing or all songsfrom an audio CD to MEM. A statusbar appears on the top of thedisplay when the recording processstarts and disappears when theprocess has ended. Copy protectedCDs cannot be recorded to MEM.

Recording to MEM

PressO REC, then select RecordCurrent Song or Record All Songson Disc. If the track has startedplaying, the system will restart thetrack and begin recording from thebeginning of the track. When thesong recording is completed, themessage Song Recorded to MEMdisplays, and there may be a slightpause.

Songs recorded to MEM are storedas the current date, disc and tracknumber.

Re-recording a PreviouslyRecorded Disc

If the disc or track has already beenrecorded to MEM, the messageThe Song(s) is Already Recordeddisplays.


Stopping the Recording

Press theO REC button whilerecording from an audio CD todisplay the stop recording option.Select Stop Recording Songto MEM.

Renaming Recorded Discs

Discs that have been recorded toMEM can be renamed.


2. Select Rename Recorded Discs.

3. Select the disc.

4. Select Album or Artist to renameeither one.

5. Use the menu knob to enterthe character sequence. SeeOperation on page 6‑7 formore information.

Recording From MP3/WMADiscs or USB Storage Devices

USB Host Support

The USB connector uses the USBstandards, 1.1 and 2.0.

USB Supported Devices. USB Flash Drives. Portable USB Hard Drives

Recording to MEM

PressO REC, then select RecordCurrent Song or Record CurrentFolder.

The information stored by MEM istitled according to the ID3 tagassociated with it.

Re-recording a PreviouslyRecorded Disc

If the disc or track has already beenrecorded to MEM, the messageThe Song(s) is Already Recordeddisplays.

Stopping the Recording

Press theO REC button whilerecording from an MP3/WMA CD orUSB storage device to display thestop recording option. Select StopRecording Song to MEM.

Deleting Tracks From MEM

Individual tracks and all tracks canbe deleted from MEM.

To delete individual tracks, pressand release the DEL button whilethe track is playing.

To delete all tracks from MEM,press and hold the DEL button whilea track is playing.


Playing From MEM

Playing Back a PreviouslyRecorded CD

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to selecta track if MEM is already playingfrom the previously recorded disc.

1. Select Recorded Disc List.

2. Select the disc.


Searching For a Track

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres




2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, or Genres.

4. Select the track. The search rateincreases if the menu knob iscontinuously turned whilesearching in a list.

Shuffle Songs

Select the Shuffle Songs optionfrom the MEM menu to randomlyplay back tracks stored in MEM.

Configuring MEM Favorites

During MEM playback, press theFAV button to change betweenfavorite categories. The favoritecategories are:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Genres

To remove MEM favoritescategories:



3. Select MEM Favorites.

4. Remove the check mark fromthe box to remove that MEMfavorites category.

Replace the check mark to re-addthe removed category.

Saving MEM Tracks asFavorites

Favorites can be saved bypressing and holding one of the1 to 6 buttons. Favorites can bestored according to the following list:

Playlist: Adds currently playingtrack to the playlist selected.

Artist: Saves the artist associatedwith the currently playing track inthe indicated favorites position.


Album: Saves the albumassociated with the currently playingtrack in the indicated favoritesposition.

Genre: Saves the genre associatedwith the currently playing track inthe indicated favorites position.

Creating Playlists

To create a playlist using tracksstored in MEM:

1. Select Playlist from the MEMfavorites.

2. Select the track to be stored inthe playlist.

3. Press and hold one of the1 to 6 buttons until the trackcan be heard again to store thetrack.

4. Repeat steps 1 though 3 to storeadditional tracks in the playlist.

Auxiliary Devices(Radio with CD)The auxiliary input allows portabledevices to be connected using the3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack or theoptional USB port.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOperation on page 6‑7.

The auxiliary input is located in thecenter console.

3.5mm Auxiliary Input Jack

Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm auxiliaryinput jack can only be controlledusing the controls on the device.

Adjusting the Volume

Turn the VOL/O knob to adjust thevolume of the infotainment systemafter the volume level has been seton the portable audio device.

USB Port

For vehicles with a USB port, thefollowing devices may be connectedand controlled by the infotainmentsystem.. iPod's. PlaysForSure Devices (PFD). USB Drives. Zune's

Not all iPod's, PFD's, USB Drives,and Zune's are compatible with theinfotainment system.


Connecting and Controllingan iPod™

Not all iPod's can be controlled bythe Infotainment System.

Connecting an iPod

Connect the iPod to the USB port.


Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres. Audiobooks. Composers



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,Audiobooks, or Composers.


Shuffle

Press the MENU/SEL knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to On orOff, then press the 0 BACK buttonto return the main screen.

On: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in random order.

Off: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in sequential order.

Repeat

Press the MENU/SEL knob and setRepeat to On or Off, then press the0 BACK button to return the mainscreen.

On: Repeats the current track.

Off: Playback starts from thebeginning of the current track afterthe last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aPlaysForSure Device (PFD)or Zune™

Connecting a PFD or Zune

Connect the PFD or Zune to theUSB port.


Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres




2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts,or Genres.


Shuffle Functionality

Press the MENU/SEL knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Press the MENU/SEL knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Playback starts fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aUSB Drive

The infotainment system can onlyplay back .mp3 and .wma files froma USB drive.

Only the first 2,500 songs arerecognized on the device.

When a device is not supported,the message “No supported datafound. You can safely disconnectthe device” appears.

Connecting a USB Drive

Connect the USB drive to theUSB port.


It is normal for the search feature totake some time to display theinformation after reading the discdue to the amount of informationstored on the disc.

Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag display asUnknown.

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists*. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Folder View

*This only displays if a playlist isfound on the device.



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.



Shuffle Functionality

Press the MENU/SEL knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Press the MENU/SEL knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Playback starts fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Auxiliary Devices (Radiowith CD/DVD/MEM)The auxiliary input allows portabledevices to be connected using the3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack or theoptional USB port.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOperation on page 6‑7.

The auxiliary input is located in thecenter console.

3.5mm Auxiliary Input Jack

Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm auxiliaryinput jack can only be controlledusing the controls on the device.

Adjusting the Volume

Turn the VOL/O knob to adjust thevolume of the infotainment systemafter the volume level has been seton the portable audio device.

USB Port

The following devices may beconnected to the USB port andcontrolled by the infotainmentsystem.. iPod's. USB Mass Storage Devices

Not all iPod's or USB Mass StorageDevices are compatible with theinfotainment system.


Connecting and Controllingan iPod™

Not all iPod's can be controlled bythe Infotainment System.

Connecting an iPod

Connect the iPod to the USB port.

Selecting a Track


. Pressg SEEK orl SEEK toselect the previous or next track.

. Turn the MENU/SEL knob toselect the track in the currentsub menu. The track will startto play.


Press the MENU/SEL knob and setShuffle Songs to On or Off.

Shuffle On: Plays current tracks inrandom order.

Shuffle Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.


Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Composers. Audiobooks




2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists,Albums, Song Titles, Genres,Composers, or Audiobooks.

4. Select the track. The search rateincreases if the MENU/SEL knobis continuously turned whilesearching in a list.

Connecting and Controlling aUSB Drive

Files that are not stored in foldersare displayed in the rootdirectory (USB).

Connecting a USB Drive

Connect the USB drive to theUSB port.

Disconnecting a USB Drive

A USB drive should be ejected fromthe USB port before disconnectingit. To eject a USB drive:


2. Select USB Eject.




Selecting a Track


. Pressg SEEK orl SEEK toselect the previous or next track.

. Turn the MENU/SEL knob toselect a track in the current submenu. The track will start to play.

Selecting a track in a differentfolder:


2. Select Folder List.

3. Select the folder.


Searching for Tracks

It is normal for the search feature totake some time to display theinformation after reading the devicedue to the amount of informationstored.

Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag display asUnknown.

Tracks can be searched by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres




2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists,Albums, Song Titles, Genres,Composers, or Audiobooks.

4. Select the track. The search rateincreases if the MENU/SEL knobis continuously turned whilesearching in a list.

Recording Tracks to MEM

See Mass Storage Media (MEM) onpage 6‑25 for more information.

Rear SeatInfotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) SystemThe vehicle may have a DVD RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) system.The RSE system works with thevehicle's infotainment system. TheDVD player is part of the front radio.The RSE system includes a radiowith a DVD player, two rear seatvideo display screens, audio/videojacks, two wireless headphones,and a remote control. See CD/DVDPlayer on page 6‑21 or theseparate navigation system manualfor more information on the vehicle'sDVD system.


Before Driving

The RSE is for rear seatpassengers only. The drivercannot safely view the videoscreen while driving.

In severe or extreme weatherconditions, the RSE system may notwork until the temperature is withinthe operating range. The operatingrange is above −20°C (−4°F)and below 60°C (140°F). If thetemperature is outside of this range,heat or cool the vehicle until it iswithin the operating range.

Global Off

Depending on the infotainmentsystem, the RSE system mayhave a Global Off feature. TheGlobal Off feature disables all RSEsystem features. Press and holdthe radio power button for morethan three seconds for Global Offto disable the RSE features.

On some infotainment systems, theGlobal Off feature can be turned offby performing one of the following:. Press and hold the radio power

button for more thanthree seconds.

. Insert or eject any disc.

. Insert a DVD video disc.

. Press the Remote Control powerbutton.

. Press the MEM/DVD/AUX buttonor thek button when a DVDvideo disc is in the player.

. Press the SRC button on thesteering wheel when a DVDvideo disc is in the player.

. Cycle the ignition.

Headphones

RSE includes two 2-channelwireless headphones. Channel 1is dedicated to the DVD player,and Channel 2 is dedicated to anyexternal auxiliary device connectedto the A/V jacks. The headphonesare used to listen to variousmulti‐media. The wirelessheadphones have an On/Off button,channel 1/2 switch, and a volumecontrol. Turn the headphones offwhen not in use.

Push the On/Off button to turn onthe headphones. A light on theheadphones comes on. If the lightdoes not come on, check thebatteries. Intermittent sound or staticcan also indicate weak batteries.See “Battery Replacement” later inthis section for more information.


Infrared transmitters are on thetop of the left seatback videoscreen. The headphones shut offautomatically to save the batterypower if the RSE system is shutoff or if the headphones are out ofrange of the transmitters for morethan three minutes. Moving toofar forward or stepping out of thevehicle, can cause the headphonesto lose the signal or have static.

The headphones may automaticallyturn off after four hours ofcontinuous use.

To adjust the volume on theheadphones, use the volumecontrol.

For best audio performance, theheadphones must be worn correctly,with the headband over the top ofthe head. L (Left) and R (Right)are above the ear pads andare indicators as to how theheadphones should be placed onthe head.

Notice: Do not store theheadphones in heat or directsunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will notbe covered by the warranty.Storage in extreme cold canweaken the batteries. Keep theheadphones stored in a cool, dryplace.

If the foam ear pads become wornor damaged, they can be replacedseparately from the headphones.See your dealer/retailer for moreinformation.

Battery Replacement

To change the batteries:

1. Loosen the screw to the batterydoor located on the left side ofthe headphones.

2. Slide the battery door open.

3. Replace the two AAA batteries.

4. Replace the battery door andtighten the screw.

Remove the batteries if theheadphones are not going to beused for a long period of time.

Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

If available, the A/V jacks arelocated on the rear of the floorconsole. They allow audio or videocables to be connected from anauxiliary device such as acamcorder or a video game system.

The A/V jacks are color coded:. Yellow for video input.. White for left audio input.. Red for right audio input.

Power for auxiliary devices is notsupplied by the radio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of theRSE system:

1. Connect the auxiliary devicecables to the A/V jacks.

2. Power on both the auxiliarydevice and the RSE videoscreen.


Changing the Source on the VideoDisplay Screens

The image from the auxiliary devicecan be switched between the videodisplay screens.

To change the display:

1. Press the AUX button on theremote control to change thesource of both video screensfrom the DVD player to theauxiliary device.

2. Press the AUX button a secondtime to change the left videoscreen source to the DVD playerand the right video screen to theauxiliary device.

3. Press the AUX button a thirdtime to change the left videoscreen source to the auxiliarydevice and the right videoscreen to the DVD player.

4. Press the AUX button a fourthtime to change the source ofboth video screens to the DVDplayer.

How to Change the RSE VideoScreen Settings

The screen display mode,brightness, and language can bechanged from the setup menu usingthe remote control. To change asetting:

1. Pressz .

2. Usen ,q , p ,o andr toselect the settings.

3. Pressz again to exit thesetup menu.

Audio Output

Audio from the DVD player orauxiliary inputs can be heardthrough the following:. Wireless Headphones. Vehicle Speakers

The RSE system transmits theaudio signal to the wirelessheadphones if an audio signal isavailable. See “Headphones” earlierin this section for more information.

The front seat passengers are ableto listen to playback from the A/Vjacks through the vehicle speakersby selecting Rear A/V as the sourceon the radio.


Video Screens

The video screens are located in theback of the driver and frontpassenger seats.

To use the video screen:

1. Push the release button locatedon the seatback console.

2. Move the screen to the desiredviewing position.

Push the video screen down into itslocked position when it is not in use,the screen turns off automatically.

Only the left RSE seatback consolecontains the infrared transmitters forthe wireless headphones, they maybe visible as eight illuminated LEDs.These LEDs are not on the rightvideo screen. Both seatbackconsoles contain an infraredreceiver for the remote control.They are located at the top of eachconsole.

Notice: Avoid directly touchingthe video screen, as damage mayoccur. See “Cleaning the VideoScreen” later in this section formore information.

Video Screen Input Jack

Each video screen is equippedwith a video input jack to allowvideo cables to be connected froman auxiliary device such as acamcorder or a video game system.This signal will override any videoprovided by the RSE system; eitherthe DVD or Auxiliary A/V jacksource. The RSE system must beon for this input to operate.

Remote Control

To use the remote control, aim it atthe transmitter window at eitherseatback console and press thebutton. Direct sunlight or very brightlight could affect the ability of theRSE transmitter to receive signalsfrom the remote control. Checkthe batteries if the remote controldoes not seem to be working. See“Battery Replacement” later in thissection. Objects blocking the line ofsight could also affect the functionof the remote control.


If a CD, DVD, or MP3 disc is in theRadio DVD slot, the remote controlO button can be used to turn onthe video screen display and startthe disc. The infotainment systemcan also turn on the video screendisplay. See CD/DVD Player onpage 6‑21 or the separatenavigation system manual formore information.

Notice: Storing the remotecontrol in a hot area or in directsunlight can damage it, and therepairs will not be covered by thewarranty. Storage in extreme coldcan weaken the batteries. Keepthe remote control stored in acool, dry place.

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press to turn thevideo screens on and off.

P (Illumination): Press to turnthe remote control backlight on.The backlight times out after severalseconds if no other button ispressed.

v (Title): Press to return to themain menu of the DVD. Thisfunction could vary for each disc.

y (Main Menu): Press to accessthe DVD menu. The DVD menu isdifferent on every DVD. Use thenavigation arrows to move thecursor. After making a selectionpress the enter button. This buttononly operates when using a DVD.

n ,q, p,o (Menu NavigationArrows): Use the arrow buttons tonavigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press to select thehighlighted choice in any menu.

z (Display Menu): Press toadjust the brightness, screendisplay mode, and display thelanguage menu.

q (Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when the displaymenu or a DVD menu is active.

c (Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding aDVD. Press twice to return to thebeginning of the DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press to startplaying a DVD. Press to pause aDVD while it is playing. Press againto continue playing.

Depending on the infotainmentsystem in the vehicle, DVDplayback may be slowed down bypressings then[. Reverse

slow play by pressings thenr.

Presss again to cancel slow play.

t (Previous Track/Chapter):Press to go to the start of thecurrent track or chapter. Pressagain to go to the previous track orchapter. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.


u (Next Track/Chapter): Pressto go to the beginning of the nextchapter or track. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press toquickly reverse the DVD or CD.To stop fast reversing a DVD video,presss. To stop fast reversing a

DVD audio or CD, releaser.This button might not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stopfast forwarding a DVD video,presss To stop fast forwarding

a DVD audio or CD, release[.This button might not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

e (Audio): Press to change audiotracks on DVDs that have thisfeature when the DVD is playing.

{ (Subtitles): Press to turnON/OFF subtitles and to movethrough subtitle options when aDVD is playing.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switchthe video display between the DVDplayer and an auxiliary source.

d (Camera): Press to changethe camera angle on DVDs thathave this feature when the DVD isplaying.

\ (Clear) (If Available): Pressthis button within three secondsafter inputting a numeric selection,to clear all numeric inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries)(If Available): Press this button toselect chapter or track numbersgreater than 9. Press this buttonbefore inputting the number.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):The numbered keypad provides thecapability of direct chapter or tracknumber selection.

Replacing the Remote Control

If the remote control becomes lostor damaged, a new universalremote control can be purchased.Use a Toshiba® code set forreplacement universal remotecontrols.


Battery Replacement

To change the remote controlbatteries:

1. Slide back the rear cover on theremote control.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment.

3. Replace the battery cover.

Remove the batteries from theremote control if unused for anextended period of time.

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action

No power. The ignition might not be turned toON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The picture does not fill the screen.There are black borders on the topand bottom or on both sides or itlooks stretched out.

Check the display mode settings inthe setup menu by pressing thedisplay menu button on the remotecontrol.

In auxiliary mode, the picture movesor scrolls.

Check the auxiliary inputconnections at both devices.

The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is noobstruction between the remotecontrol and the transmitter window.Check the batteries to make surethey are not dead or installedincorrectly.

After stopping the player, I pushPlay but sometimes the DVD startswhere I left off and sometimes at thebeginning.

If the stop button was pressedone time, the DVD player resumesplaying where the DVD wasstopped. If the stop button waspressed two times the DVD playerbegins to play from the beginning ofthe DVD.


Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)

Problem Recommended Action

The auxiliary source is running butthere is no picture or sound.

Check that the RSE video screenis in the auxiliary source mode bypressing the AUX button on theremote control.Check the auxiliary inputconnections at both devices.

Sometimes the wireless headphoneaudio cuts out or buzzes.

Check for obstructions, lowbatteries, reception range, andinterference from cellular telephonetowers or by using a cellulartelephone in the vehicle.Check that the headphones areon correctly using the L (left) andR (right) on the headphones.Check that the headphones arepositioned properly with theheadband across the top ofthe head.

I lost the remote and/or theheadphones.

See your dealer/retailer forassistance.

The DVD is playing, but there is nopicture or sound.

Check that the RSE video screen issourced to the DVD player bypressing the AUX button on theremote control.

DVD Display Error Messages

The DVD display error messagedepends on which radio the vehiclehas. The video screen may displayone of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error orMechanical Error: There aredisc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error or UnknownFormat: The disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or ifthe disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error or Disc Error:The disc is not from a correctregion.

No Disc Inserted: No disc ispresent when theZ EJECT orMEM/DVD/AUX button is pressedon the radio.


DVD Distortion

Video distortion can occur whenoperating cellular phones, scanners,CB radios, Global Position Systems(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax,or walkie talkies.

It might be necessary to turn off theDVD player when operating one ofthese devices in or near the vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the RSE SeatbackConsole

Use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water to clean the RSEseatback console surface.

Cleaning the Video Screen

Use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water. Use care whentouching or cleaning the screen asdamage could result.

Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth capable cellphone with a Hands‐Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls.The infotainment system and voicerecognition are used to control thesystem. The system can be usedwhile the ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY. The range ofthe Bluetooth system can be up to9.1 m (30 ft.). Not all phones supportall functions and not all phoneswork with the Bluetooth system.See www.gm.com/bluetooth formore information about compatiblephones.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on theinfotainment system and thesteering wheel to operate theBluetooth system.

Steering Wheel Controls

b / g (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, to confirmsystem information, and to startvoice recognition.

$ /c (Mute/End Call): Press toend a call, reject a call, or to cancelan operation.

Infotainment System Controls

For information about how tonavigate the menu system usingthe infotainment controls, seeOperation on page 6‑7.

5 (Phone): Press to enter thePhone main menu.

Voice Recognition

The voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

Noise: The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.


When to Speak: A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the Bluetooth system,sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakers andoverrides the audio system. Usethe VOL/O knob during a call tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. The systemmaintains a minimum volume level.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 12‑16 for FCC information.

Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls)For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 6‑7 .

Pairing

A Bluetooth enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem first and then connected tothe vehicle before it can be used.See the cell phone manufactureruser guide for Bluetooth functionsbefore pairing the cell phone. If aBluetooth phone is not connected,calls will be made using OnStar®

Hands‐Free Calling, if available.Refer to the OnStar Owner's Guidefor more information.

The pairing process can be startedby using the voice recognitionsystem or the controls on theinfotainment system.

Pairing Information:. Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the Bluetooth system.. The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.. The Bluetooth system links with

the first available paired cellphone in the order the phonewas paired.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. Pairing should only need to becompleted once, unless changesto the pairing information havebeen made or the phone isdeleted.

To link to a different paired phone,see “Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.


Pairing a Phone


2. Select Phone Settings.

3. Select Bluetooth.

4. Select Pair Device (Phone).A four digit PIN number appearson the display.

5. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that will be paired tothe vehicle. Reference the cellphone manufacturers user guidefor information on this process.

Locate the device named“General Motors” in the list onthe cell phone and follow theinstructions on the cell phone toenter the four digit PIN numberprovided by the system.

6. The system prompts for a namefor the phone and confirms thename provided. This name isused to indicate which phone isconnected.

7. The system responds with“<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones




4. Select Device List.

Deleting a Paired Phone





5. Select the phone to delete andfollow the on screen prompts.

Linking to a Different Phone

To link to a different phone, the newphone must be in the vehicle andavailable to be connected to thebluetooth system before the processis started.





5. Select the new phone to link toand follow the on screenprompts.

If delete is selected, thehighlighted phone will bedeleted.


Making a Call

Radio with CD

1. Press the 5 / 0 button.

2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 6‑7 for more information.

3. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.

Radio with CD/DVD and MEM

1. Press the 5 / 0 button.

2. Select Enter number.

3. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 6‑7 for more information.

4. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When a call is received, theinfotainment system mutes and aring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knobto Answer and press theMENU/SEL knob.

Declining a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knobto Decline and press theMENU/SEL knob.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knobto Answer and press theMENU/SEL knob.

Declining a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knobto Decline and press theMENU/SEL knob.

Switching Between Calls(Call Waiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls:


2. Select Switch Call fromthe menu.

Conference Calling

Conference calling and three waycalling must be supported on thebluetooth phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier to work.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:


2. Select Enter Number.


3. Enter the character sequencethen select Call. See “Enteringa Character Sequence” inOperation on page 6‑7 formore information.

4. After the call has been placed,press the MENU/SEL knob andchoose Merge Calls.

5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeatSteps 1 through 4. The amountof callers that can be added arelimited by your wireless servicecarrier.

Ending a Call

Press the MENU/SEL knob andselect Hang Up.

Muting a Call

To Mute a Call

Press the MENU/SEL knob andselect Mute Call.

To Cancel Mute

Press the MENU/SEL knob andselect Mute Call.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu drivenphone system.

1. Press the MENU/SEL knob andselect Enter Number.

2. Enter the character sequence,see “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 6‑7 for more information.

Bluetooth(Voice Recognition)

Pairing

A Bluetooth cell phone must bepaired to the Bluetooth system andthen connected to the vehicle beforeit can be used. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide forBluetooth functions before pairingthe cell phone. If a Bluetooth phoneis not connected, calls will be madeusing OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,if available. Refer to the OnStarowner's guide for more information.





when the vehicle is moving.. The Bluetooth system links with

the first available paired cellphone in the order the phonewas paired.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information changes orthe phone is deleted.

To link to a different paired phone,see Linking to a Different Phonelater in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press b / g.. For vehicles without a

navigation system, thesystem responds “Ready”,followed by a tone.

. For vehicles with anavigation system, thesystem responds with atone. After the tone say“Hands Free”. The systemresponds “Ready”, followedby a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The systemresponds “Bluetooth ready”,followed by a tone.

3. Say “Pair”. The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPIN number. The PIN numberwill be used in Step 4.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that will be paired tothe vehicle. Reference the cellphone manufacturers user guidefor information on this process.

Locate the device named“General Motors” in the list onthe cell phone and follow theinstructions on the cell phone toenter the four‐digit PIN numberthat was provided in Step 3.

5. The system prompts for a namefor the phone. This name will beused to indicate which phone isconnected. The system confirmsthe name.

6. The system responds with“<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 foradditional phones to be paired.







3. Say “List”. The system lists allthe paired Bluetooth devices.The system will respond “isconnected” if a phone isconnected to the vehicle.






3. Say “Delete”. The system askswhich phone to delete followedby a tone.

4. Say the name of the phone tobe deleted. If the phone nameis unknown, use the “List”command for a list of all pairedphones. The system responds“Would you like to delete<phone name>? Yes or No”,followed by a tone.

5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone.The system responds “OK,deleting <phone name>”.

Linking to a Different Phone






3. Say “Change phone”. Thesystem responds “Please waitwhile I search for other phones”.. If another phone is found,

the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected”.

. If another phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing Name Tags

The system can store up tothirty phone numbers as nametags that are shared between theBluetooth and OnStar systems.

The system uses the followingcommands to store and retrievephone numbers:. Store. Digit Store. Directory

Using the Store Command

The store command allows a phonenumber to be stored withoutentering the digits individually.




2. Say “Store”. The systemresponds “Store, numberplease”, followed by a tone.

3. Say the complete phone numberto be stored at once with nopauses.. If the system recognizes

the number, the response is“OK, Storing”.

. If the system does notrecognize the phonenumber, the response is“Store <Phone number>”.“Please say yes or no”.If the number is correct, say“Yes”. If the number is notcorrect, say “No”. Thesystem will ask for thenumber again.

4. After the system stores thephone number, it responds“Please say the name tag”,followed by a tone.


5. Say a name tag for the phonenumber. The name tag isrecorded and the systemresponds “About to store<name tag>. Does thatsound OK?”.. If the name tag does not

sound correct, say “No”and repeat Step 5.

. If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” and thename tag is stored. Afterthe number is stored thesystem returns to themain menu.

Using the Digit Store Command

The digit store command allows aphone number to be stored byentering the digits individually.




2. Say “Digit Store”. The systemresponds with “Please say thefirst digit to store”, followed bya tone.

3. Say the first digit to be stored.The system will repeat back thedigit it heard followed by a tone.Continue entering digits until thenumber to be stored is complete.. If an unwanted number is

recognized by the system,say “Clear” at any time toclear the last number.

. To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time.

4. After the complete number hasbeen entered, say “Store”. Thesystem responds “Please saythe name tag”, followed bya tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phonenumber. The name tag isrecorded and the systemresponds “About to store<name tag>. Does thatsound OK?”.. If the name tag does not

sound correct, say “No” andrepeat Step 5.

. If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” and thename tag is stored. Afterthe number is stored thesystem returns to themain menu.


Using the Directory Command

The directory command lists all ofthe name tags stored by the system.To use the directory command:




2. Say “Directory”. The systemresponds “Directory” and lists allstored name tags. The systemreturns to the main menu whenthe list is complete.

Deleting Name Tags

The system uses the followingcommands to delete name tags:. Delete. Delete all name tags

Using the Delete Command

The delete command is used todelete specific name tags.

To delete name tags:




2. Say “Delete”. The systemresponds “Delete, please saythe name tag”, followed bya tone.

3. Say the name tag to be deleted.The system responds “Wouldyou like to delete, <name tag>?Please say yes or no”.. If the name tag is correct,

say “Yes” to delete thename tag. The systemresponds with “OK, deleting<name tag>, returning tothe main menu.”

. If the name tag is incorrect,say “No”. The systemresponds with “No. OK, let'stry again, please say thename tag.”


Using the Delete All Name TagsCommand

The Delete All Name Tagscommand deletes all stored phonebook name tags and route nametags for OnStar, if stored.

To delete all name tags:

1. Press b / g .

. For vehicles without anavigation system, thesystem responds “Ready”,followed by a tone.


2. Say “Delete all name tags”. Thesystem responds “You are aboutto delete all name tags stored inyour phone directory and yourroute destination directory. Areyou sure you want to do this?Please say yes or no.”. Say “Yes” to delete all

name tags.. Say “No” to cancel the

function and return to themain menu.

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands:. Dial. Digit Dial. Call. Re‐dial

Using the Dial Command




2. Say “Dial”. The system responds“Dial using <phone name>.“Number please”, followed bya tone.


3. Say the entire number withoutpausing.. If the system recognizes

the number, it respondswith “OK, Dialing” and dialsthe number.

. If the system does notrecognize the number, itconfirms the numbersfollowed by a tone. If thenumber is correct, say“Yes”. The system responds“OK, Dialing” and dials thenumber. If the number isnot correct, say “No”. Thesystem will ask for thenumber again.

Using the Digit Dial Command




2. Say “Digit Dial”. The systemresponds “Digit dial using<phone name>, please say thefirst digit to dial”, followed bya tone.

3. Say the digits to be dialed one ata time. The system repeats backthe digit it heard followed bya tone.

4. Continue entering digits until thenumber to be dialed is complete.After the whole number hasbeen entered, say “Dial”. Thesystem responds “OK, Dialing”and dials the number.. If an unwanted number is

recognized by the system,say “Clear” at any time toclear the last number.

. To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time.


Using the Call Command




2. Say “Call”. The system responds“Call using <phone name>.Please say the name tag”,followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag of the personto call.. If the system recognizes

the name tag it responds“OK, calling, <name tag>”and dials the number.

. If the system does notrecognize the name tag, itconfirms the name tagfollowed by a tone. If thename tag is correct, say“Yes”. The system respondswith “OK, calling, <nametag>” and dials the number.If the name tag is notcorrect, say “No”. Thesystem will ask for thename tag again.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the Re‐dial Command



. For vehicles with anavigation system, thesystem responds with atone. After the tone say“Hands Free”. The systemresponds with “Ready”,followed by a tone.

2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. Thesystem responds “Re‐dial using<phone name>” and dials thelast number called from theconnected Bluetooth phone.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b g to answer the call.

. Pressc / $ to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier.

. Press b g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b g again to return to theoriginal call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Pressc / $ to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three‐Way Calling

Three‐way calling must besupported on the Bluetooth phoneand enabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b g. Thesystem responds with “Ready”,followed by a tone.

2. Say “Three‐way call”.The system responds with“Three‐way call, please say dialor call”.

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b g to link all the callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Pressc / $ to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To Mute a call

1. Press b g. The systemresponds “Ready”, followed bya tone.

2. Say “Mute Call”. The systemresponds “Call muted”.

To Cancel Mute


2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”.The system responds“Resuming call”.


Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system andthe cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to the CellPhone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b g . The systemresponds “Ready”, followed bya tone.

2. Say “Transfer Call.” The systemresponds “Transferring call” andthe audio transfers to the cellphone.

To Transfer Audio to the In-VehicleBluetooth System

The cell phone must be pairedand connected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY.

For vehicles without a navigationsystem, press b g during a callwith the audio on the cell phone, theaudio transfers to the vehicle.

For vehicles with a navigationsystem, press b g during a callwith the audio on the cell phone.If the audio does not transfer to thevehicle, use the audio transferfeature on the cell phone. See thecell phone manufacturers user guidefor more information.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass‐thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:





3. Say “Voice”. The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>”.. The cell phone's normal

prompt messages will gothrough its cycle accordingto the phone's operatinginstructions.



The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers and the numbersstored as name tags during a call.Use this feature when calling amenu driven phone system. Accountnumbers can also be stored for use.

Sending a Number During a Call


2. Say “Dial”. The system responds“Say a number to send tones”,followed by a tone.

3. Say the number to send.. If the system recognizes

the number, it responds“OK, Sending Number” andthe dial tones are sent andthe call continues.

. If the system does notrecognize the number, itresponds “Dial Number,please say yes or no?”,followed by a tone. If thenumber is correct, say“Yes”. The system responds“OK, Sending Number” andthe dial tones are sent andthe call continues.

Sending a Stored Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Send name tag.” Thesystem responds “Say a nametag to send tones”, followed bya tone.

3. Say the name tag to send.. If the system recognizes

the number, it responds“OK, Sending <name tag>”and the dial tones are sentand the call continues.

. If the system does notrecognize the name tag, itresponds “Dial <name tag>,please say yes or no?”,followed by a tone. If thename tag is correct, say“Yes”. The system respondswith “OK, Sending <nametag>” and the dial tones aresent and the call continues.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious sections on Deleting aPaired Phone and DeletingName Tags.


Bluetooth (Navigation)For information about how tonavigate the menu system usingthe infotainment controls, see“Overview” under Introduction,in the Navigation supplement.

Bluetooth Pairing

To make calls with a Bluetooth cellphone through your vehicle, it mustbe paired to the vehicle's Bluetoothsystem first and then connectedto the vehicle before it can beused. Refer to the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forBluetooth pairing instructions.If a Bluetooth phone is off or notconnected, calls will automaticallybe made using the OnStar®

Hands‐Free Calling feature,if available. Refer to the OnStarowner's guide for more informationabout OnStar Hands-Free Calling.




when the vehicle is moving.. The Bluetooth system

automatically links with thepaired cell phone in the orderthe phones are listed in thedevice list.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the vehicle'sBluetooth system at a time.

. Pairing should only need to becompleted once.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press the CONFIG hard keyrepeatedly until the Phone menuis shown or touch the Phone tabon the screen.

2. Select the Bluetooth submenu.


3. Select “Add New Phone”, thepairing process will beginsearching for Bluetooth deviceson your cellular phone. See thecell phone manufacturer's userguide for information on thisprocess.

On the cell phone, locate thedevice named “General Motors”.Follow the instructions given onthe cell phone or follow the voiceprompts, to enter the four digitPIN number that has beenprovided.

4. The system voice promptrequests that you say the nameyou want used for the phone thatis being paired. Use a name thatbest describes the phone. Thesystem voice prompt thenrepeats the name you providedfor confirmation, say “Yes”.

5. The system responds with“phone name has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.


1. Press the CONFIG hard keyrepeatedly until the Phone menuis shown or touch the Phone tabdisplayed on the screen.



3. Select the Device List submenu. A list of all previously paired phoneswill be displayed. If there is acurrently paired phone, a checkmark will appear on the right side ofthe Phone name.





3. Select the Device List submenu. 4. Select the phone to be deletedand then follow the on screenprompts to delete the devicefrom the system.

5. Once a phone has been deleted,the only way to connect back tothat phone is to pair the phoneagain. See “Bluetooth Pairing”earlier before the process isstarted.


Connecting to a Phone in theDevice List

In order to connect to anotherphone in the Device List, make surethe phone you would like to connectto is in the vehicle and available tobe connected to the Bluetoothsystem before the process isstarted.



3. Select the Device List submenu. 4. Select the phone to be pairedand then follow the on screenprompts.


5. The Phone menu will bedisplayed with the name of thephone paired.

Making a Call

Press the 5 on the infotainmentsystem to access the Phone menu.

Enter Number

Use this option to enter a phonenumber and make a call. To do this:

1. Press the Enter Numberselection. A dial pad displays onthe navigation screen.

2. Enter the desired phone numberby touching the appropriatebuttons on the screen or usingthe rotary knob.

3. Press the Call button to makethe call.

Accepting or Declining anIncoming Call

When an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anyaudio being played and sounds aring tone.


Accepting a Call

Press b g on the steering wheelcontrol to answer the incoming callor touch the Answer option toanswer the call.

Declining a Call

Pressc / $ on the steering wheelcontrols or select the Decline optionto decline the call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Switching Calls (Only Availablewith Call Waiting)

This features allows you to switchbetween calls making one callactive and placing the other on hold.

Conference Calling

Conference and three-way callingmust be supported on the Bluetoothphone and enabled by the wirelessservice carrier to work.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Press the 5 hard key on thefaceplate until the Phone mainscreen is shown with the currentactive call.

2. Select the “Enter Number”option.


3. Make another call. The first callwill be placed on hold while thesecond call is dialing andconnected.

4. To make a conference call,select the “Merge” option whichwill merge both calls into oneconference call.

5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeatSteps 2 and 4. The amount ofcallers that can be added arelimited by your wireless servicecarrier.

Ending a Call

1. Press the 5 hard key.

2. Select Hang Up.

Mute or UnMute a Call

1. Press the 5 hard key.

2. Select the Mute call option tomute the call.

3. Select the Mute call option againto unmute the call.


The in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call for“Dial 1 or 2”, for phone numberextensions, or voice mailboxes.

1. Press the PHONE hard key.

2. Select “Enter Number” optionand enter the number sequence.


2 NOTES

Climate Controls 7-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 7-1Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Climate Control SystemsThe vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlledwith this system.

A. Fan Control

B. Air Delivery Mode Control

C. Temperature Control

D. Outside Air

E. Defrost

F. Rear Window Defogger

G. Recirculation

H. Air Conditioning

9 (Fan Control): Turn to increaseor decrease the fan speed. Turn theknob completely to T to turn thefan off.

Temperature Control: Turn toincrease or decrease thetemperature.

7-2 Climate Controls

Air Delivery Mode Control:To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

F (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

* (Bi-Level): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets and thefloor outlets.

7 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

W (Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 (Defrost): Clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning on or off.If the fan is turned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing, theair conditioning will not work.

h (Recirculation): Press to turnon the recirculation. An indicatorlight comes on. Air is recirculatedinside the vehicle. It helps to quicklycool the air inside the vehicle orprevent outside air and odors fromentering.

% (Outside Air): Press to turnon the outside air. An indicator lightcomes on. Outside air is circulatedthroughout the vehicle.

Rear Window Defogger

< (Rear Defogger): Press toturn the rear window defogger on oroff. The rear window defogger turnsoff after about 10 minutes. It canalso be turned off by turning theignition to ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF. If turned on again, itruns for about five minutes beforeturning off.


Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger gridlines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.


Automatic Climate Control SystemThe vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlledwith this system.

Without Heated Seats

A. Fan Control

B. AUTO

C. Air Delivery Mode Control

D. Defrost

E. Recirculation

F. Temperature Control

G. Power

H. Air Conditioning

I. Rear Window Defogger

J. Outside Air


With Heated Seats

A. Fan Control

B. AUTO

C. Air Delivery Mode Control

D. Defrost

E. Recirculation

F. Temperature Control

G. Power

H. Driver and PassengerHeated Seats

I. Rear Window Defogger

J. Air Conditioning

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning and recirculation toheat or cool the vehicle to theselected temperature.

When the AUTO indicator light ison, the system is in full automaticoperation.

To place the system inautomatic mode:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded.


Manual Operation

O (Power): Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.

9 (Fan Control): Turn to increaseor decrease the fan speed.Adjusting the fan speed while inautomatic mode places the fanunder manual control. The AUTOindicator light turns off. The airdelivery mode remains in automaticcontrol.

Temperature Control: Turnto increase or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

H / G (Air Delivery ModeControl): Press mode up or modedown to cycle through the differentair delivery modes. The currentmode is shown on the display.

Select from the following:

F (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

* (Bi-Level): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets and thefloor outlets.

7 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

W (Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 (Defrost): Clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.Selecting defrost disables theautomatic mode.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.


Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning on or off.If the fan is turned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing, theair conditioning will not work. Whenin AUTO, the air conditioning willcome on automatically as needed.

h (Recirculation): Press toturn on the recirculation. Press toalternate between recirculation andoutside air, if the vehicle does nothave a separate outside air button.

The indicator light turns on whenrecirculation is selected. Air isrecirculated inside the vehicle.It helps quickly cool the air insidethe vehicle or prevent outside airand odors from entering.

% (Outside Air, If Equipped):Press to turn on the outside air. Anindicator light comes on. Outside airis circulated throughout the vehicle.


Rear Window Defogger

< (Rear Defogger): Press toturn the rear window defogger on oroff. The rear window defogger turnsoff after about 10 minutes. It canalso be turned off by turning theignition to ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF. If turned on again, itruns for about five minutes beforeturning off.


Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger gridlines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

L / M (Driver and PassengerHeated Seats): For vehicles withheated seats, see Heated FrontSeats on page 2‑8.

Sensors

The solar sensor, located on top ofthe instrument panel near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system usesthe information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery mode.

Do not cover the solar sensor or thesystem will not work properly.

Air VentsUse the air outlets, located in thecenter and on the side of theinstrument panel, to direct theairflow. Use the thumbwheelslocated near the center air outlets,to open or close off the airflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from air inlets at thebase of the windshield that couldblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non‐GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer/retailerbefore adding equipment to theoutside of the vehicle.

Driving and Operating 8-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDriving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 8-19Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 8-20Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 8-23Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 8-28Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 8-30Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . 8-31Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 8-33Parking Over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 8-35Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . 8-37

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 8-41

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41

StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 8-46Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 8-54Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 8-54

8-2 Driving and Operating

California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 8-54Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63Trailer SwayControl (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64

Driving Information

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control, if equipped.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.


Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearyour safety belt, see Safety Belts onpage 2‑10.

{ WARNING

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

. Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniquescould save your life.

Drunk Driving

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or ifyou are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show thatalmost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, thesedeaths are the result of someonewho was drinking and driving.In recent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-relateddeaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problem isfor people never to drink alcoholand then drive.


Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person's system canmake crash injuries worse,especially injuries to the brain,spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who has beendrinking — driver or passenger — isin a crash, that person's chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had notbeen drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systemshelp to control the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control of thevehicle. See StabiliTrak System onpage 8‑43.

Adding non‐dealer/non‐retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 9‑3.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Lighton page 4‑21.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree‐fourths of a second. But that isonly an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as twoor three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, andeyesight all play a part. So doalcohol, drugs, and frustration. Buteven in three‐fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 100 km/h(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). Thatcould be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enoughspace between the vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition ofthe road, whether it is wet, dry,or icy; tire tread; the condition of thebrakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavybraking. Some people drive inspurts — heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy braking — ratherthan keeping pace with traffic. Thisis a mistake. The brakes might nothave time to cool between hardstops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster with a lot of heavybraking. Keeping pace with thetraffic and allowing realistic followingdistances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.


If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. If the brakes are pumped,the pedal could get harder to pushdown. If the engine stops, there willstill be some power brake assist butit will be used when the brake isapplied. Once the power assist isused up, it can take longer to stopand the brake pedal will be harderto push.

Adding non‐dealer/non‐retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 9‑3.

Steering

Electric Power Steering(2.4L L4 Engine)

If the engine stalls while driving, thepower steering assist system willcontinue to operate until you areable to stop the vehicle. If power

steering assist is lost because theelectric power steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

If you turn the steering wheel ineither direction several times until itstops, or hold the steering wheel inthe stopped position for anextended amount of time, you maynotice a reduced amount of powersteering assist. The normal amountof power steering assist shouldreturn shortly after a few normalsteering movements.

The electric power steering systemdoes not require regularmaintenance. If you suspectsteering system problems, suchas abnormally high steering effortfor a prolonged period of time,contact your dealer/retailer forservice repairs.

Hydraulic Power Steering(3.0L V6 Engine)

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thepower steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and the roadsurface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and vehicle speed.While in a curve, speed is the onefactor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve, andthen accelerate gently into thestraightaway.


Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out fromnowhere, or a child darts out frombetween parked cars and stops rightin front of you. These problems canbe avoided by braking— if you canstop in time. But sometimes youcannot stop in time because there isno room. That is the time forevasive action— steering aroundthe problem.

The vehicle can perform very well inemergencies like these. First applythe brakes. See Braking onpage 8‑4 . It is better to remove asmuch speed as possible from acollision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o'clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is onlyslightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy. Easeoff the accelerator and then, if thereis nothing in the way, steer so thatthe vehicle straddles the edge of the


pavement. Turn the steering wheel8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), aboutone-eighth turn, until the right fronttire contacts the pavement edge.Then turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens when thethree control systems— brakes,steering, and acceleration— do nothave enough friction where the tiresmeet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions,and by not overdriving thoseconditions. But skids are alwayspossible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle's three controlsystems. In the braking skid, thewheels are not rolling. In thesteering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, toomuch throttle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, the vehiclemay straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important toslow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance is longerand vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try your best toavoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You mightnot realize the surface is slipperyuntil the vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues— such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface— and slow down when youhave any doubt.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.


Off-Road DrivingVehicles with all‐wheel drive can beused for off‐road driving. Vehicleswithout all‐wheel drive should not bedriven off-road except on a level,solid surface.

Many of the vehicle design featuresthat help make the vehicle moreresponsive on paved roads duringpoor weather conditions also helpmake it better suited for off‐road usethan conventional passengervehicles. The vehicle does not havefeatures usually thought to benecessary for extended or severeoff‐road use such as specialunderbody shielding and transfercase low gear range.

The airbag system is designed towork properly under a wide range ofconditions, including off‐road usage.Always wear your safety belt andobserve safe driving speeds,especially on rough terrain.

Drinking and driving can be verydangerous on any road and this iscertainly true for off-road driving. At

the very time you need specialalertness and driving skills, yourreflexes, perceptions, and judgmentcan be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You could have aserious — or even fatal — accidentif you drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking.

Off-roading can be great fun but hassome definite hazards. The greatestof these is the terrain itself. Whenoff-road driving, traffic lanes are notmarked, curves are not banked, andthere are no road signs. Surfacescan be slippery, rough, uphill,or downhill.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers. Failure to operate thevehicle correctly off‐road couldresult in loss of vehicle control orvehicle rollover.

Off-roading involves some newskills. That is why it is veryimportant that you read thesedriving tips and suggestions to helpmake off-road driving safer andmore enjoyable.

Before You Go Off-Roading. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work done.. Make sure there is enough fuel,

that fluid levels are where theyshould be, and that the sparetire is fully inflated.

. Be sure to read all theinformation about all-wheel-drivevehicles in this manual.

. Make sure all underbodyshields, if the vehicle has them,are properly attached.

. Know the local laws that apply tooff-roading where you will bedriving or check with lawenforcement people in the area.

. Be sure to get the necessarypermission if you will be onprivate land.


Loading Your Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ WARNING

. Cargo on the load floor piledhigher than the seatbackscan be thrown forward duringa sudden stop. You or yourpassengers could be injured.Keep cargo below the top ofthe seatbacks.

. Unsecured cargo on the loadfloor can be tossed aboutwhen driving over roughterrain. You or yourpassengers can be struck byflying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Heavy loads on the roof raisethe vehicle's center of gravity,making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehiclerolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not onthe roof. Keep cargo in thecargo area as far forward andlow as possible.

There are some important things toremember about how to load yourvehicle.. The heaviest things should be

on the floor, forward of the rearaxle. Put heavier items as farforward as you can.

. Be sure the load is properlysecured, so things are nottossed around.

You will find other importantinformation under Vehicle LoadLimits on page 8‑24 and Tires onpage 9‑43.


Environmental Concerns

Off-road driving can providewholesome and satisfyingrecreation. However, it also raisesenvironmental concerns. Werecognize these concerns and urgeevery off-roader to follow thesebasic rules for protecting theenvironment:. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenspecially set aside for publicoff-road recreational driving andobey all posted regulations.

. Avoid any driving practice thatcould damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturbwildlife. This includeswheel-spinning, breaking downtrees, or unnecessary drivingthrough streams or over softground.

. Always carry a litter bag andmake sure all refuse is removedfrom any campsite beforeleaving.

. Take extreme care with openfires (where permitted), campstoves, and lanterns.

. Never park your vehicle over drygrass or other combustiblematerials that could catch firefrom the heat of the vehicle'sexhaust system.

Traveling to Remote Areas

It makes sense to plan your trip,especially when going to a remotearea. Know the terrain and planyour route. Get accurate maps oftrails and terrain. Check to see ifthere are any blocked or closedroads.

It is also a good idea to travel withat least one other vehicle in casesomething happens to one of them.

For vehicles with a winch, be sure toread the winch instructions. In aremote area, a winch can be handyif you get stuck but you will want toknow how to use it properly.

Getting Familiar with Off-RoadDriving

It is a good idea to practice in anarea that is safe and close to homebefore you go into the wilderness.Off-roading requires some new anddifferent skills.

Tune your senses to different kindsof signals. Your eyes need toconstantly sweep the terrain forunexpected obstacles. Your earsneed to listen for unusual tire orengine sounds. Use your arms,hands, feet, and body to respond tovibrations and vehicle bounce.


Controlling the vehicle is the key tosuccessful off-road driving. One ofthe best ways to control the vehicleis to control the speed. At higherspeeds:. You approach things faster and

have less time to react.. There is less time to scan the

terrain for obstacles.. The vehicle has more bounce

when driving over obstacles.. More braking distance is

needed, especially on anunpaved surface.

{ WARNING

When you are driving off-road,bouncing and quick changes indirection can easily throw youout of position. This could causeyou to lose control and crash.So, whether you are drivingon or off the road, you and yourpassengers should wear safetybelts.

Scanning the Terrain

Off-road driving can take you overmany different kinds of terrain. Befamiliar with the terrain and its manydifferent features.

Surface Conditions: Off-roadingsurfaces can be hard-packed dirt,gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud,snow, or ice. Each of these surfacesaffects the vehicle's steering,acceleration, and braking in differentways. Depending on the surface,slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,delayed acceleration, poor traction,and longer braking distances canoccur.

Surface Obstacles: Unseen orhidden obstacles can be hazardous.A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump canstartle you if you are not preparedfor them. Often these obstacles arehidden by grass, bushes, snow,or even the rise and fall of theterrain itself.


Some things to consider:. Is the path ahead clear?. Will the surface texture change

abruptly up ahead?. Does the travel take you uphill or

downhill?. Will you have to stop suddenly

or change direction quickly?

When driving over obstacles orrough terrain, keep a firm grip onthe steering wheel. Ruts, troughs,or other surface features can jerkthe wheel out of your hands.

When driving over bumps, rocks,or other obstacles, the wheels canleave the ground. If this happens,even with one or two wheels, youcannot control the vehicle as well orat all.

Because you will be on an unpavedsurface, it is especially important toavoid sudden acceleration, suddenturns, or sudden braking.

Off-roading requires a different kindof alertness from driving on pavedroads and highways. There are noroad signs, posted speed limits,or signal lights. Use good judgmentabout what is safe and what is not.

Driving on Hills

Off-road driving often takes you up,down, or across a hill. Driving safelyon hills requires good judgment andan understanding of what thevehicle can and cannot do. Thereare some hills that simply cannot bedriven, no matter how well built thevehicle.

{ WARNING

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. If you drive upthem, you will stall. If you drivedown them, you cannot controlyour speed. If you drive across

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

them, you will roll over. You couldbe seriously injured or killed.If you have any doubt about thesteepness, do not drive the hill.

Approaching a Hill

When you approach a hill, decide ifit is too steep to climb, descend,or cross. Steepness can be hard tojudge. On a very small hill, forexample, there may be a smooth,constant incline with only a smallchange in elevation where you caneasily see all the way to the top. Ona large hill, the incline may getsteeper as you near the top, but youmight not see this because the crestof the hill is hidden by bushes,grass, or shrubs.


Consider this as you approach a hill:. Is there a constant incline,

or does the hill get sharplysteeper in places?

. Is there good traction on thehillside, or will the surface causetire slipping?

. Is there a straight path up ordown the hill so you will nothave to make turningmaneuvers?

. Are there obstructions on the hillthat can block your path, suchas boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?

. What is beyond the hill? Is therea cliff, an embankment, adrop-off, a fence? Get out andwalk the hill if you do not know.It is the smart way to find out.

. Is the hill simply too rough?Steep hills often have ruts,gullies, troughs, and exposedrocks because they are moresusceptible to the effects oferosion.

Driving Uphill

Once you decide it is safe to driveup the hill:. Use a low gear and get a firm

grip on the steering wheel.. Get a smooth start up the hill

and try to maintain speed. Notusing more power than neededcan avoid spinning the wheels orsliding.

{ WARNING

Turning or driving across steephills can be dangerous. You couldlose traction, slide sideways, andpossibly roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. Whendriving up hills, always try to gostraight up.

. Try to drive straight up the hill ifat all possible. If the path twistsand turns, you might want to findanother route.

. Ease up on the speed as youapproach the top of the hill.

. Attach a flag to the vehicle to bemore visible to approachingtraffic on trails or hills.

. Sound the horn as you approachthe top of the hill to let opposingtraffic know you are there.

. Use headlamps even during theday to make the vehicle morevisible to oncoming traffic.

{ WARNING

Driving to the top (crest) of a hillat full speed can cause anaccident. There could be adrop-off, embankment, cliff,or even another vehicle. Youcould be seriously injured orkilled. As you near the top of ahill, slow down and stay alert.


If the vehicle stalls, or is about tostall, and you cannot make it upthe hill:. Push the brake pedal to stop the

vehicle and keep it from rollingbackwards and apply theparking brake.

. If the engine is still running, shiftthe transmission to R (Reverse),release the parking brake, andslowly back down the hill inR (Reverse).

. If the engine has stoppedrunning, you need to restart it.With the brake pedal pressedand the parking brake stillapplied, shift the transmission toP (Park) and restart the engine.Then, shift to R (Reverse),release the parking brake, andslowly back down the hill asstraight as possible inR (Reverse).

. While backing down the hill, putyour left hand on the steeringwheel at the 12 o'clock positionso you can tell if the wheels arestraight and can maneuver asyou back down. It is best to backdown the hill with the wheelsstraight rather than in the left orright direction. Turning the wheeltoo far to the left or right willincrease the possibility of arollover.

Things not to do if the vehicle stalls,or is about to stall, when going upa hill:. Never attempt to prevent a stall

by shifting into N (Neutral) torev-up the engine and regainforward momentum. This will notwork. The vehicle can rollbackward very quickly and couldgo out of control.

. Never try to turn around if aboutto stall when going up a hill.If the hill is steep enough to stallthe vehicle, it is steep enough tocause it to roll over. If youcannot make it up the hill, backstraight down the hill.

If, after stalling, you try to backdown the hill and decide you justcannot do it, set the parking brake,put your transmission in P (Park),and turn off the engine. Leave thevehicle and go get some help. Exiton the uphill side and stay clear ofthe path the vehicle would take if itrolled downhill.


Driving Downhill

When off-roading takes youdownhill, consider:. How steep is the downhill? Will I

be able to maintain vehiclecontrol?

. What is the surface like?Smooth? Rough? Slippery?Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?

. Are there hidden surfaceobstacles? Ruts? Logs?Boulders?

. What is at the bottom of the hill?Is there a hidden creek bank oreven a river bottom with largerocks?

If you decide you can go down a hillsafely, try to keep the vehicleheaded straight down. Use a lowgear so engine drag can help thebrakes so they do not have to do allthe work. Descend slowly, keepingthe vehicle under control at alltimes.

{ WARNING

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and aserious accident. Apply thebrakes lightly when descending ahill and use a low gear to keepvehicle speed under control.

Things not to do when driving downa hill:. When driving downhill, avoid

turns that take you across theincline of the hill. A hill that is nottoo steep to drive down might betoo steep to drive across. Thevehicle could roll over.

. Never go downhill with thetransmission in N (Neutral),called free-wheeling. The brakeswill have to do all the work andcould overheat and fade.

Vehicles are much more likely tostall when going uphill, but if ithappens when going downhill:

1. Stop the vehicle by applying theregular brakes and apply theparking brake.

2. Shift to P (Park) and, while stillbraking, restart the engine.

3. Shift back to a low gear, releasethe parking brake, and drivestraight down.

4. If the engine will not start, getout and get help.


Driving Across an Incline

An off-road trail will probably goacross the incline of a hill. To decidewhether to try to drive across theincline, consider the following:

{ WARNING

Driving across an incline that istoo steep will make your vehicleroll over. You could be seriouslyinjured or killed. If you have anydoubt about the steepness of theincline, do not drive across it.Find another route instead.

. A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steepto drive across. When goingstraight up or down a hill, thelength of the wheel base — thedistance from the front wheels tothe rear wheels — reduces thelikelihood the vehicle will tumbleend over end. But when driving

across an incline, the narrowertrack width — the distancebetween the left and rightwheels — might not prevent thevehicle from tilting and rollingover. Driving across an inclineputs more weight on the downhillwheels which could cause adownhill slide or a rollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it — a rock, a rut,etc. — and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline evenworse. If you drive across a rockwith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

For these reasons, carefullyconsider whether to try to driveacross an incline. Just because thetrail goes across the incline doesnot mean you have to drive it. Thelast vehicle to try it might haverolled over.

If you feel the vehicle starting toslide sideways, turn downhill. Thisshould help straighten out thevehicle and prevent the sideslipping. The best way to preventthis is to “walk the course” first, soyou know what the surface is likebefore driving it.


Stalling on an Incline

{ WARNING

Getting out on the downhill (low)side of a vehicle stopped acrossan incline is dangerous. If thevehicle rolls over, you could becrushed or killed. Always get outon the uphill (high) side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.

If the vehicle stalls when crossingan incline, be sure you, and anypassengers, get out on the uphillside, even if the door there is harderto open. If you get out on thedownhill side and the vehicle startsto roll over, you will be right inits path.

If you have to walk down the slope,stay out of the path the vehicle willtake if it does roll over.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

When you drive in mud, snow,or sand, the wheels do not get goodtraction. Acceleration is not asquick, turning is more difficult, andbraking distances are longer.

It is best to use a low gear when inmud — the deeper the mud, thelower the gear. In really deep mud,keep the vehicle moving so it doesnot get stuck.

When driving on sand, wheeltraction changes. On loosely packedsand, such as on beaches or sanddunes, the tires will tend to sink intothe sand. This affects steering,accelerating, and braking. Drive at areduced speed and avoid sharpturns or abrupt maneuvers.

Hard packed snow and ice offerthe worst tire traction. On thesesurfaces, it is very easy to losecontrol. On wet ice, for example, thetraction is so poor that you will havedifficulty accelerating. And, if thevehicle does get moving, poorsteering and difficult braking cancause it to slide out of control.

{ WARNING

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous.Underwater springs, currentsunder the ice, or sudden thawscan weaken the ice. Your vehiclecould fall through the ice and youand your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.


Driving in Water

{ WARNING

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires, andyou could lose traction and rollthe vehicle over. Do not drivethrough rushing water.

Heavy rain can mean flash flooding,and flood waters demand extremecaution.

Find out how deep the water isbefore driving through it. Do nottry it if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe — you probably will not getthrough. Deep water can damagethe axle and other vehicle parts.

If the water is not too deep, driveslowly through it. At faster speeds,water splashes on the ignitionsystem and the vehicle can stall.Stalling can also occur if you get thetailpipe under water. If the tailpipe isunder water, you will never be ableto start the engine. When goingthrough water, remember that whenthe brakes get wet, it might takelonger to stop. See Driving on WetRoads on page 8‑19.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody,chassis, or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, steering,suspension, wheels, tires, axles,and exhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

The vehicle requires more frequentservice due to off-road use. Refer tothe Maintenance Schedule foradditional information.


Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under your vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.


Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 9‑43.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park your vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep interior temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Going down steep or long hills,shift to a lower gear.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.


{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Top of hills: Bealert — something could be inyour lane (stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 8‑38 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped,on slippery surfaces.


Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be in aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 12‑6.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(two inches) on the side ofthe vehicle that is away fromthe wind to bring in fresh air.


. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in theIndex.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)


Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, soyou might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.


To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph) asshown on the speedometer.

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 9‑64.

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears.Release the accelerator pedal whileshifting, and press lightly on theaccelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get thevehicle out after a few tries, it mightneed to be towed out. If the vehicledoes need to be towed out, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 9‑78.


Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory‐installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can change

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

the way the vehicle handles.These could cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's center

pillar (B-pillar). With the driver'sdoor open, you will find the labelattached near the door lockpost. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the originalequipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 9‑43 and TirePressure on page 9‑50 .

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle Weight


Rating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs and

there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacityis 650 lbs (1400 − 750(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

See Trailer Towing on page 8‑61for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips.

Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).


Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight and

seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle specific Certificationlabel is attached to the lowercenter pillar on the driver side ofthe vehicle or on the rear edgeof the driver door. The label tellsthe gross weight capacity of thevehicle, called the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). The


GVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel,and cargo. Never exceed theGVWR for the vehicle, or theGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.

If the vehicle is carrying a heavyload, it should be spread out.See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way the vehicle handles.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

These could cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as you can.Try to spread the weightevenly.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.


Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

. During the first 1 000 km(600miles), avoid using morethan moderate accelerationin lower gears and avoidvehicle speeds above110 km/h (68mph).

. Between the first 1 000 km(600miles) and 5 000 km(3,000 miles), heavyacceleration in lower gears

can be used. Vehicle speedsabove 110 km/h (68mph)should be limited tofive minutes per use.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See DrivingCharacteristics and TowingTips on page 8‑58 for thetrailer towing capabilities ofyour vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer/retailer.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and apply thebrake pedal.


A (LOCK/OFF): This is the onlyposition from which the key can beremoved. This locks the steeringwheel, ignition and automatictransmission.

On vehicles with an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein P (Park) to turn the ignition switchto the LOCK/OFF position.

The ignition switch can bind in theLOCK/OFF position with the wheelsturned off center. If this happens,move the steering wheel from rightto left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work,then the vehicle needs service.

B (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition provides power to some ofthe electrical accessories. It unlocksthe steering wheel and ignition. Thetransmission is also unlocked in thisposition on automatic transmissionvehicles. To move the key fromACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF,push in the key and then turn it toLOCK/OFF.

C (ON/RUN): The ignition switchstays in this position when theengine is running. This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories, including theventilation fan and 12 volt poweroutlet, as well as to display somewarning and indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if thekey is left in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position with the engineoff. The vehicle might not start if thebattery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

D (START): This position starts theengine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchwill return to ON/RUN for normaldriving.

A warning tone sounds when thedriver door is opened if the ignitionis still in ACC/ACCESSORY and thekey is in the ignition.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof (if equipped)

Power to the audio system willcontinue to operate for up to10 minutes or until the driver door isopened.

Power to the power windows andsunroof will continue to operate forup to 10 minutes or until any door isopened.

All these features will work when thekey is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.


Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart thevehicle when it is already moving,use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as the enginewarms. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switch toACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after5 to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Push theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START for amaximum of 15 seconds. Wait atleast 15 seconds between eachtry, to allow the cranking motorto cool. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.


If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat theprocedure. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates.Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer/retailer. If you do not, theengine might not performproperly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Engine Coolant HeaterThe engine coolant heater,if available, can help in cold weatherconditions at or below −18°C (0°F)for easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up.Plug in the coolant heater at leastfour hours before starting thevehicle. An internal thermostat inthe plug-end of the cord will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above −18°C (0°F).

To Use The Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord.

The electrical cord is located onthe passenger side of the enginecompartment, in front of the aircleaner.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer/retailerin the area where you will beparking the vehicle for the bestadvice on this.


Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 8‑58.

Use this procedure to shift intoP (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake onpage 8‑40 for more information.

2. Hold the button on the shift leverand push the lever toward thefront of the vehicle into P (Park).

3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key.

Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, the vehicle mustbe in P (Park) and the parkingbrake set.

Release the button and check thatthe shift lever cannot be moved outof P (Park).


Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weight ofthe vehicle puts too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, thevehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

Shifting Out of ParkTo shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), see your dealer/retailer for service.

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.


Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. The vehicle’s exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 8‑34.


{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 8‑32.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 8‑58.

AutomaticTransmission

The automatic transmission shiftlever is located on the consolebetween the seats.

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. Use P (Park) whenstarting the engine because thevehicle cannot move easily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 8‑32. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 8‑58.

The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must fully apply theregular brake first and then pressthe shift lever button before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition key


is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever, then push the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting Out of Park onpage 8‑33.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle is Stuck on page 8‑23.

N (Neutral): In this position theengine and transmission do notconnect. Use N (Neutral) to restart avehicle that is already moving.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

Notice: If the vehicle seems toaccelerate slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehiclethat way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away. You candrive in L (Low) when you aredriving less than 56 km/h (35mph)and D (Drive) for higher speedsuntil then.

M (Manual Mode): Allows thedriver to select the range of gearpositions. If the vehicle has thisfeature, see Manual Mode onpage 8‑37.


Manual Mode

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

ERS or manual mode allows for theselection of the range of gearpositions. Use this mode whendriving down hill or towing a trailerto limit the top gear and vehiclespeed. The shift position indicatorwithin the Driver Information Center(DIC) will display a number next tothe M indicating the highestavailable gear under manual modeand the driving conditions whenmanual mode was selected.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus button onthe shift lever, to increase ordecrease the gear rangeavailable.

When shifting to M (Manual Mode),the transmission will shift to a presetlower gear range. For this presetrange, the highest gear available isdisplayed next to the M in the DIC.See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 4‑27 for more information.All gears below that number areavailable to use. For example,when 4 (Fourth) is shown next tothe M, 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth)gears are shifted automatically.To shift to 5 (Fifth) gear, pressthe + (Plus) button or shift intoD (Drive).

M (Manual Mode) will preventshifting to a lower gear range if theengine speed is too high. If vehiclespeed is not reduced within the timeallowed, the lower gear range shiftwill not be completed. Slow thevehicle, then press the − (Minus)button to the desired lower gearrange.

While using the ERS, cruise controlcan be used.

Fuel Economy ModeThe vehicle may have a FuelEconomy Mode. When engaged,fuel economy mode can improve thevehicle's fuel economy.

Press the “eco” (economy) button bythe shift lever to turn this feature onor off. The “eco” light in theinstrument cluster will come onwhen engaged. See Fuel EconomyLight on page 4‑25. For vehicles


with a Driver Information Center(DIC) an “ECO Mode On” messagedisplays. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 4‑35 for moreinformation.

When Fuel Economy Mode is on:. The transmission will upshift

sooner and downshift later.. The torque converter clutch will

apply sooner and stay on longer.. The gas pedal will be less

sensitive.. The vehicle's computer will more

aggressively shut off fuel to theengine under deceleration.

. The engine idle speed will belower.

. Driving performance is moreconservative.

Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveWith this feature, engine power isalways sent to all four wheels. It isfully automatic, and adjusts itself asneeded for road conditions.

When using a compact spare tire onan AWD vehicle, the systemautomatically detects the compactspare and disables AWD. To restoreAWD operation and preventexcessive wear on system, replacethe compact spare with a full-sizetire as soon as possible. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 9‑73for more information.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.


If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 4‑22.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. The ABS pump or motormight be heard operating, and thebrake pedal might be felt to pulsate,but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.


Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down, thenpush the parking brake pedal down.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Lighton page 4‑21.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the park brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, the brakesystem warning light will be on anda chime will sound warning you thatthe parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 8‑58.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsations orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedalas the driving situation dictates.The brake assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.


Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature, which may be usefulwhen the vehicle is stopped on agrade. This feature is designed toprevent the vehicle from rolling,either forward or rearward, duringvehicle drive off. After drivercompletely stops and holds thevehicle in a complete standstill on agrade, HSA will be automaticallyactivated. During the transitionperiod between when the driverreleases the brake pedal and startsto accelerate to drive off on a grade,HSA holds the braking pressure toensure that there is no rolling back.The brakes will automaticallyrelease when the accelerator pedalis applied within the two secondwindow. It will not activate if thevehicle is in a drive gear and facingdownhill or if the vehicle is facinguphill and in R (Reverse).

Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheel spin.On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, thesystem operates if it senses thatone or both of the front wheels arespinning or beginning to losetraction. On an All-Wheel-Drive(AWD) vehicle, the system willoperate if it senses that any of thewheels are spinning or beginning tolose traction. When this happens,the system brakes the spinningwheel(s) and/or reduces enginepower to limit wheel spin.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working, but this isnormal.

The TCS/StabiliTrak warning lightwill flash to indicate that the tractioncontrol system is active.

This warning light comes on if thereis a problem with TCS, and thesystem will not limit wheel spin.Adjust your driving accordingly.


TCS automatically comes onwhenever the vehicle is started.To limit wheel spin, especially inslippery road conditions, the systemshould always be left on. But, TCScan be turned off if needed.

Notice: Do not repeatedly brakeor accelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle's driveline couldbe damaged.

The TCS off light comes on and“Traction Control Off” is displayedon the Driver Information Center(DIC) to indicate that the tractioncontrol system has been turned off.See Ride Control System Messageson page 4‑36.

On AWD vehicles, when TCS isturned off, the system may stillmake noise. This is normal andnecessary with AWD hardware.

It may be necessary to turn thesystem off if the vehicle ever getsstuck in sand, mud or snow androcking the vehicle is required. SeeIf the Vehicle is Stuck on page 8‑23for more information. See alsoWinter Driving on page 8‑21 forinformation on using TCS whendriving in snowy or icy conditions.

Traction control can be turnedoff by pressing and releasing theTCS/StabiliTrak button, on theconsole, until the TCS/StabiliTraklight comes on the instrument paneland “Traction Control Off” appearsin the DIC. Press the button againto turn the system back on. Forinformation on turning StabiliTrak offand on, see “StabiliTrak System”following in this section.

Adding non‐GM accessories canaffect the vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 9‑3 for more information.


StabiliTrak SystemThe vehicle has a vehicle stabilityenhancement system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer controlled system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a differencebetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to help steerthe vehicle in the intended direction.

When the stability control systemactivates, the Traction ControlSystem (TCS)/StabiliTrak light willflash on the instrument panel.

This also occurs when tractioncontrol is activated. A noise may beheard or vibration may be felt in thebrake pedal. This is normal.Continue to steer the vehicle in theintended direction.

If there is a problem detected withStabiliTrak, a “Service StabiliTrak”message will be displayed on theDriver Information Center (DIC).When this message is displayedand the StabiliTrak light comes on,the system is not operational.Driving should be adjustedaccordingly. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 4‑36.

StabiliTrak comes on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started. Toassist with directional control of thevehicle, the system should alwaysbe left on.

StabiliTrak can be turnedoff by pressing and holding theTCS/StabiliTrak button, on theconsole, until the TCS Off andStabiliTrak Off lights come on theinstrument panel and “StabiliTrakOff” appears in the DIC. Forinformation on turning TCS off andon, see “Traction Control System(TCS)” earlier in this section.

If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage.Press the cruise control button toreengage when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 8‑44 for more information.


Cruise ControlWith cruise control, the vehicle canmaintain a speed of about 40 km/h(25 mph) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol shuts off.

If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak®

or traction control system andbegins to limit wheel spin whileusing cruise control, the cruisecontrol automatically disengages.See StabiliTrak System onpage 8‑43 or Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 8‑41. Whenroad conditions allow you to safelyuse it again, the cruise control canbe turned back on.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

{ WARNING

If you leave your cruise control onwhen you are not using cruise,you might hit a button and go intocruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruisecontrol switch off until you want touse cruise control.

The cruise control buttons arelocated on the steering wheel.

5 (On/Off): Press to turn thecruise control system on and off.

\ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

RES/+ (Resume/Accel): Move thethumbwheel up to resume a setspeed or to accelerate to a higherspeed.

SET/− (Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down toward SET/− toset a speed and activate cruisecontrol or to decrease the speed.


To set a speed:

1. Press5 to turn the cruisecontrol system on.

2. Get to the speed desired.

3. Move the thumbwheel downtoward SET/− and release it.The desired set speed brieflyappears in the instrument panelcluster.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

When the brakes are applied, thecruise control shuts off.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the brakes are applied or thecancel button is pressed while thecruise control is at a set speed, thecruise control disengages withouterasing the set speed from memory.

Once the vehicle reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, movethe thumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly. The vehicle returns to thespeed selected previously and staysthere.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready engaged,. Move the thumbwheel up toward

RES/+ and hold it until thevehicle accelerates to thedesired speed, and thenrelease it.

. To increase the speed in smallamounts, move the thumbwheelup toward RES/+ briefly andthen release it. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready engaged,. Move the thumbwheel down

toward SET/− and hold until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in very smallamounts, move the thumbwheeldown toward SET/− briefly andthen release it. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.


Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle's speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle slows down to the previouslyset cruise control speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehicle'sspeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle's speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to maintain thevehicle's speed. When the brakesare applied the cruise controlshuts off.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to disengagethe cruise control:. Step lightly on the brake pedal

or clutch; when cruise controldisengages, the indicator lightwill go off.

. Press\ .

. Press5 to turn the cruisecontrol system off completely.The cruise control cannot beresumed.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speedmemory is erased when the cruisecontrol or the ignition is turned off.

Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking AssistFor vehicles with the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,it assists the driver with parkingand avoiding objects while inR (Reverse). URPA operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph),and the sensors on the rear bumperdetect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)behind the vehicle, and at least20 cm (8 in) off the ground.


{ WARNING

The Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system does notreplace driver vision. It cannotdetect:

. Objects that are below thebumper, underneath thevehicle, or if they are tooclose or far from the vehicle

. Children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

If you do not use proper carebefore and while backing; vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Even with URPA, alwayscheck behind the vehicle beforebacking up. While backing, besure to look for objects and checkthe vehicle's mirrors.

The display is located in theheadliner.

URPA uses three color-coded lightsto provide distance and systeminformation.

How the System Works

URPA comes on automatically andthe display briefly illuminates toindicate the system is working whenthe shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse).

If the vehicle is traveling faster then8 km/h (5 mph) in reverse, the redlight on the rear display flashes.

Objects must be at least 20 cm (8 in)off the ground, below liftgate level,and within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the rearbumper to be detected. Thedistance may be less during warmeror humid weather.

A single beep sounds the first timean object is detected between 0.6 m(23 in) and 2.5 m (8 ft) away.Beeping occurs continuously whenthe vehicle is 0.6 m (23 in) or closerto an object.


The following describes how the URPA display lights appear as the vehiclegets closer to a detected object:

Description Metric English

amber light 2.5 m 8 ft

amber/amber lights 1.0 m 40 in

amber/amber/red lights andcontinuous beeping for

five seconds0.6 m 23 in

amber/amber/red lights flashingand continuous beeping for

five seconds0.3 m 1 ft

Park Assist Off displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC) toindicate that URPA is off, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 4‑27 for more information.

System Settings

Each time the vehicle is startedURPA defaults to the On setting.

Use the Vehicle Personalization onpage 4‑39 menu toconfigure URPA.

The settings are:. On: Turns URPA on. Off: Turns URPA off. Tow Bar: Use when a tow bar is

attached to the vehicle

Tow Bar

When the tow bar setting is used,an area of 16 cm (6 in) around thehitch is not detected by the system.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

If the URPA system does notactivate due to a temporarycondition, the message Park AssistOff displays on the DIC and a redlight is shown on the rear URPAdisplay when the shift lever ismoved into R (Reverse). This canoccur under the followingconditions:. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 9‑81.

. A trailer was attached to thevehicle, or an object washanging out of the liftgate duringthe last drive cycle, a red lightmay come on in the rear display.Once the attached object isremoved, URPA will return tonormal operation.


. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle and the tow bar setting isnot being used, or an oddshaped tow bar is attached tothe vehicle and the tow barsetting is being used.

. The vehicle's bumper isdamaged. Take the vehicle toyour dealer/retailer to repair thesystem.

. Other conditions may affectsystem performance, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck.

If the system is still disabled, afterdriving forward at least 25 km/h(15 mph), take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The vehicle may have a Rear VisionCamera (RVC) system. Read thisentire section before using it.

The RVC can assist the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle.

{ WARNING

The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)system does not replace drivervision. RVC does not:

. Detect objects that areoutside the camera's field ofview, below the bumper,or underneath the vehicle.

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not back the vehicle by onlylooking at the RVC screen, or usethe screen during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers orwhere there could be cross-traffic.Your judged distances using thescreen will differ from actualdistances.

So if you do not use proper carebefore backing up, you could hit avehicle, child, pedestrian,bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death.Even though the vehicle has theRVC system, always checkcarefully before backing up bychecking behind and around thevehicle.


Vehicles Without a NavigationSystem

When the key is in the ON/RUNposition and the driver shifts thevehicle into R (Reverse), the videoimage automatically appears on theinside rear view mirror. Once thedriver shifts out of R (Reverse), thevideo image automaticallydisappears from the inside rear viewmirror.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem Off or On

To turn off the RVC system, pressand holdz , located on the insiderearview mirror, until the leftindicator light turns off. The RVCdisplay is now disabled.

To turn the RVC system on again,press and holdz until the leftindicator light illuminates. The RVCsystem display is now enabled andthe display will appear in the mirrornormally.

Vehicles With a NavigationSystem

An image appears on the navigationscreen with the message “CheckSurroundings for Safety” when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).The navigation screen goes to theprevious screen after approximately10 seconds once the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse).

To cancel the delay, do one of thefollowing:. Press a hard key on the

navigation system.. Shift into P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

8 km/h (5 mph).

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).


3. Select Display.

4. Select Camera. When a checkmark appears next to theCamera option, then the RVCsystem is on.


Symbols

The navigation system may have afeature that lets the driver viewsymbols on the navigation screenwhile using the RVC. The UltrasonicRear Park Assist (URPA) systemmust not be disabled to use thecaution symbols. The error message“Rear Parking Assist SymbolsUnavailable” may display if URPAhas been disabled and the symbolshave been turned on. SeeUltrasonic Parking Assist onpage 8‑46.

The symbols appear and may coveran object when viewing thenavigation screen when an object isdetected by the URPA system.

To turn the symbols on or off:



3. Select Display.

4. Select Symbols. When a checkmark appears next to theSymbols option, symbols willappear.

Guidelines

The RVC system has a guidelineoverlay that can help the driver alignthe vehicle when backing into aparking spot.

To turn the guidelines on or off:



3. Select Display.

4. Select Guidelines. When acheck mark appears next to theGuidelines option, guidelines willappear.

Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERASYSTEM: This message candisplay on the navigation screenwhen the system is not receivinginformation it requires from othervehicle systems.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer/retailer.

Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is located above thelicense plate.

The area displayed by the camera islimited.

It does not display objects that areclose to either corner or under thebumper and can vary dependingon vehicle orientation or roadconditions. The distance of theimage that appears on the screen isdifferent from the actual distance.


The following illustration shows thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

A. View displayed by the camera.

B. Corner of the rear bumper.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The RVC system may not workproperly or display a clear image if:. The RVC is turned off. See

“Turning the Rear CameraSystem On or Off” earlier in thissection.

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlights is shining directly intothe camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident, the position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer/retailer.

The RVC system display in therearview mirror may turn off or notappear as expected due to one ofthe following conditions. If thisoccurs the left indicator light on themirror will flash.. A slow flash may indicate a loss

of video signal, or no videosignal present during the reversecycle.


. A fast flash may indicate that thedisplay has been on for themaximum allowable time duringa reverse cycle, or the displayhas reached an overtemperature limit.

The fast flash conditions areused to protect the video devicefrom high temperatureconditions. Once conditionsreturn to normal the device willreset and the green indicator willstop flashing.

During any of these fault conditions,the display will be blank and theindicator will continue to flash aslong as the vehicle is in R (Reverse)or until the conditions return tonormal.

Pressing and holdingz when theleft indicator light is flashing will turnoff the video display along with theleft indicator light.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.


Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meetASTM specification D 4814 in theUnited States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5or 3.511 in Canada. Somegasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT).We recommend against the use ofgasolines containing MMT. See FuelAdditives on page 8‑55 foradditional information.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California emissionsstandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 4‑18. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer/retailer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf you plan on driving in anothercountry outside the United States orCanada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leadedgasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous texton fuel. Costly repairs caused byuse of improper fuel would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.


Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves clean,or if the vehicle experiencesproblems due to dirty injectors orvalves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline. Look for the TOP TIERlabel on the fuel pump to ensuregasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer/retailer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and theperformance of the emission controlsystem could be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer/retailer for service.


Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle. Donot use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The fuel cap is behind the fuel dooron the vehicle's passenger side.Turn the fuel cap counterclockwiseto remove. Do not release the captoo soon or it will spring back.Reinstall the cap by turning itclockwise until it clicks.

If the cap is not properly installed,the Malfunction Indicator Lampcome on. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 4‑18 for moreinformation.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Do not top off or overfill the tank andwait a few seconds before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 9‑81.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer/retailer. The wrong type fuel capmight not fit properly, mightcause the malfunction indicatorlamp to light, and could damagethe fuel tank and emissionssystem. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 4‑18.


Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer/retailer ortrailering retailer for assistance withpreparing the vehicle for towing atrailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see “DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips”.

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing”.

. For information on equipment totow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment”.


For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 9‑78. For information ontowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle — such as a motorhome,see Recreational Vehicle Towing onpage 9‑78.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered by

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

the vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer/retailer for advice andinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer whenequipped with the proper trailertowing equipment. For traileringcapacity, see “Trailer Towing”following in this section. Traileringchanges handling, acceleration,braking, durability and fueleconomy. With the added weight,the engine, transmission, wheelassemblies and tires are forced towork harder and under greaterloads. The trailer also adds windresistance, increasing the pullingrequirements. For safe trailering,correctly use the proper traileringequipment.

The following information hasimportant trailering tips and rules foryour safety and that of yourpassengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Pulling A Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many laws, including

speed limit restrictions that applyto trailering. Check for legalrequirements with state orprovincial police.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)the new vehicle is driven. Theengine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

. During the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This reduces wearon the vehicle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often.


. Do not use the Fuel Saver Modewhen towing.

. Obey speed limit restrictions.Do not drive faster than themaximum posted speed fortrailers, or no more than 90 km/h(55 mph), to reduce wear on thevehicle.

. For vehicles with the UltraRear Parking Assist (URPA)system, turn the system off whentowing a trailer. If the tow baris installed while not towing atrailer, change the URPA systemto the “Tow Bar” setting. SeeUltrasonic Parking Assist onpage 8‑46 for more information.

Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires experience.Get familiar with handling andbraking with the added trailerweight. The vehicle is now longerand not as responsive as thevehicle is by itself.

Check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains,electrical connectors, lamps, tiresand mirror adjustments. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start the vehicleand trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working.

During the trip, check regularly to besure that the load is secure, and thelamps and trailer brakes are workingproperly.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.


Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument panel flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrowson the instrument panel flash forturns even if the bulbs on the trailer

are burned out. Check occasionallyto be sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving On Grades

Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before starting down along or steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down,the brakes might have to be usedso much that they would get hot andno longer work well.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantwill boil at a lower temperature thanat normal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle may show signssimilar to engine overheating. Toavoid this, let the engine run whileparked, preferably on level ground,with the transmission in P (Park) fora few minutes before turning the

engine off. If the overheat warningcomes on, see Engine Overheatingon page 9‑19.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.


3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine.

3. Shift into a gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See thismanual's Maintenance Schedule orIndex for more information. Thingsthat are especially important intrailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 9‑19.

Trailer TowingBefore pulling a trailer, there arethree important considerations thathave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer. The weight of the trailer tongue. The total weight on the vehicle's

tires

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, specialequipment, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carrymust be considered. See “Weight ofthe Trailer Tongue” later in thissection for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment.The weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.


Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh,based upon the vehicle model and options.

Vehicle

Maximum TrailerWeight with Trailer

Brakes†

GCWR*

L4 Engine, FWD 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 625 kg (5,787 lbs)

L4 Engine, AWD 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 700 kg (5,952 lbs)

V6 Engine, FWD 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 600 kg (7,937 lbs)

V6 Engine, AWD 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 700 kg (8,157 lbs)

† For trailers without trailer brakes the maximum trailer weight is 454 kg(1,000 lbs) and the GCWR is 2 300 kg (5,071 lbs). See Towing Equipmenton page 8‑63 for more information.

*The Gross Combination WeightRating (GCWR) is the totalallowable weight of the completelyloaded vehicle and trailer includingany passengers, cargo, equipmentand conversions. The GCWR for thevehicle should not be exceeded.

Ask your dealer/retailer for ourtrailering information or advice. SeeCustomer Assistance Offices onpage 12‑3 for more information.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.

If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 8‑24.

If a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch is beingused, the trailer tongue (A) shouldweigh 10 to 15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (B).


After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect ofadditional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Inflate the vehicle's tires to theupper limit for cold tires. Thesenumbers can be found on theCertification label or see VehicleLoad Limits on page 8‑24 for moreinformation. Do not go over theGVW limit for the vehicle, or theGAWR, including the weight of thetrailer tongue. If using a weightdistributing hitch, do not go over therear axle limit before applying theweight distribution spring bars.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Use the correct hitch equipment.See your dealer/retailer or a hitchdealer for assistance.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches. Donot attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If thereare, seal the holes when thehitch is removed. If the holes arenot sealed, dirt, water, anddeadly carbon monoxide (CO)from the exhaust can get into thevehicle. See Engine Exhaust onpage 8‑34.


Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongueof the trailer to help prevent thetongue from contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Leave enough slack so the rig canturn. Never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Does the trailer have its ownbrakes? Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle'sbrake system. If this is done, bothbrake systems will not work well,or at all.

Trailer SwayControl (TSC)The vehicle has a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature as part of theStabiliTrak system. If TSC detectsthat the trailer is swaying, thevehicle's brakes are automaticallyapplied.

When TSC is applying the brakes,the TCS/StabiliTrak indicatorlight flashes to notify the driver toreduce speed. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light onpage 4‑23. If the trailer continues tosway, StabiliTrak will reduce enginetorque to help slow the vehicle.

TSC will not function if StabiliTrak isturned off.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer/retailer first. Some electricalequipment can damage thevehicle and the damage wouldnot be covered by the vehicle'swarranty. Some add-on electricalequipment can keep othercomponents from working asthey should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle battery, even if the vehicle isnot operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 2‑38 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 2‑38.

Vehicle Care 9-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

California Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 9-12Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . 9-13Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . 9-19Power Steering Fluid(2.4L L4 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Power Steering Fluid(3.0L V6 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . 9-27Automatic TransmissionShift Lock Control SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . 9-29

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . 9-35

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

Electrical SystemFuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . 9-44Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

9-2 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . 9-63Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . 9-73

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer/retailer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

Vehicle Care 9-3

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inremote keyless transmitters, maycontain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer/non‐retaileraccessories to the vehicle can affectvehicle performance and safety,including such things as airbags,braking, stability, ride and handling,emissions systems, aerodynamics,durability, and electronic systemslike antilock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of theseaccessories could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation or useof non‐GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, is not

covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer/retailer can accessorize thevehicle using genuine GMAccessories. When you go to yourGM dealer/retailer and ask for GMAccessories, you will know thatGM-trained and supported servicetechnicians will perform the workusing genuine GM Accessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 2‑38.

9-4 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience,the proper replacementparts, and tools beforeattempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easilyconfused. If the wrongfasteners are used, parts canlater break or fall off. Youcould be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information onpage 12‑12.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Airbag SystemCheck on page 2‑40.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 10‑10.

Vehicle Care 9-5

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the release handle with thesymbol on it. It is below theinstrument panel, to the left ofthe steering wheel.

2. Move the secondary hoodrelease lever to the right torelease the striker. The lever isnear the middle of the hood.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, check allfiller caps are properly installed.

9-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

2.4L L4 Engine

Vehicle Care 9-7

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 9‑13.

B. Engine Cover on page 9‑9.

C. Engine Oil Dipstick (out of view).See Engine Oil on page 9‑10.

D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 9‑10.

E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrakes on page 9‑22.

F. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 9‑38.

G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 9‑74.

H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 9‑74.

I. Battery on page 9‑25.

J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 9‑16.

K. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 9‑22.

9-8 Vehicle Care

3.0L V6 Engine

Vehicle Care 9-9

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 9‑13.

B. Power Steering Fluid(2.4L L4 Engine) on page 9‑21or Power Steering Fluid(3.0L V6 Engine) on page 9‑21.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 9‑10.

D. Engine Cover on page 9‑9.

E. Engine Oil Dipstick (out of view).See Engine Oil on page 9‑10.

F. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrakes on page 9‑22.

G. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 9‑38.

H. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 9‑74.

I. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 9‑74.

J. Battery on page 9‑25.

K. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 9‑16.

L. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 9‑22.

Engine Cover

3.0L V6 Engine Cover

To remove:

1. Remove the oil fill cap.

2. Hold cover on both sides andpull upward.

3. Lift and remove the enginecover.

4. Install cover by aligning on oil filltube, then firmly pushing downonto the intake manifold.

5. Install the oil fill cap.

9-10 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle mustbe on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is ayellow loop. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 9‑6 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give theoil several minutes to drain backinto the oil pan. If this is notdone, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, addat least one liter/quart of therecommended oil. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. Forengine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 11‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.If the engine has so much oil thatthe oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that showsthe proper operating range, theengine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 9‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Vehicle Care 9-11

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for three things:. GM6094M

Use only an oil that meets GMStandard GM6094M.

. SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for thevehicle. These numbers on anoil container show its viscosity,or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such asSAE 20W-50.

. American Petroleum Institute(API) starburst symbol

Oils meeting these requirementsshould have the starburstsymbol on the container. Thissymbol indicates that the oil hasbeen certified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oilidentified as meeting GMStandard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to usethe recommended oil can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Cold Temperature Operation

If in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −29°C(−20°F), use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30engine oil. Both provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. Always use an oilthat meets the requiredspecification, GM6094M.

Engine Oil Additives / EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the starburstsymbol that meet GM standardsare all that is needed for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

9-12 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A “Change EngineOil Soon” message comes on.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 4‑34. Change the oil as soon

as possible within the next 1 000 km(600 miles). It is possible that,if driving under the best conditions,the oil life system might not indicatethat an oil change is necessary forover a year. However, the engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service peoplewho will perform this work usinggenuine parts and reset the system.It is also important to check the oilregularly and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

If the vehicle has Driver InformationCenter (DIC) buttons:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press the DIC menu button until“Remaining Oil Life” displays.

3. Press and hold the set/clearbutton until “100%” is displayed.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

The system is reset when the“Change Engine Oil Soon” messagegoes off.

Vehicle Care 9-13

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains elementsthat can be unhealthy for your skinand could even cause cancer. Donot let used oil stay on your skin.Clean your skin and nails with soapand water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothingor rags. See the manufacturer'swarnings about the use anddisposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Recycle it by taking it to aplace that collects used oil.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer service departmentand have it repaired as soon aspossible.

There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, this should bedone at your dealer/retailer servicedepartment. Contact your dealer/retailer for additional information orthe procedure can be found in theservice manual. To purchase aservice manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information onpage 12‑12.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in ScheduledMaintenance on page 10‑2, and besure to use the fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10‑7.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 9‑6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at theMaintenance II intervals and replaceit at the first oil change after each80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 10‑2 for more information.If driving in dusty/dirty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

9-14 Vehicle Care

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains caked with dirt, a new filteris required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 9‑5 .

2. Locate the air filter housing onthe front passenger side of theengine compartment. SeeEngine Compartment Overviewon page 9‑6 .

3. Remove the four air cleanerhousing cover screws.

4. Pull straight up on cover, andwhile holding the cover, removethe air filter.

How to Reinstall Engine AirCleaner/Filter

1. Install the air cleaner into the aircleaner housing. The outer aircleaner filter seal must be fittedproperly in the air cleanerhousing.

2. Align the air cleaner housingcover tabs to the air cleanerhousing.

3. Install the air cleaner housingcover using the four screws.

Vehicle Care 9-15

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Cooling System

2.4 L L4 Engine

A. Engine Cooling Fan

B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

3.0 L V6 Engine

A. Engine Cooling Fans

B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

9-16 Vehicle Care

If the coolant inside the coolantsurge tank is boiling, do not doanything else until it cools down.Park the vehicle on a level surface.

The coolant level should be at theCOLD FILL line. If it is not, theremight be a leak at the radiatorhoses, heater hoses, radiator, waterpump, or somewhere else in thecooling system.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, withthe engine on, check to see ifthe electric engine cooling fanis running. If the engine isoverheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, your vehicleneeds service. Turn off the engine.

Notice: Using coolant otherthan DEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner, at 50 000 km(30,000miles) or 24months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicleis filled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for five yearsor 240 000 km (150,000 miles),whichever occurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 9‑19.

Vehicle Care 9-17

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water tothe cooling system can bedangerous. Plain water, or someother liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolantmixture will. The vehicle's coolantwarning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, theengine could get too hot but youwould not get the overheatwarning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned. Use a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL®

coolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything elseuntil it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is notat or above the COLD mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant atthe coolant surge tank, but besure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done. See EngineOverheating on page 9‑19 for moreinformation.

The coolant surge tank is located inthe engine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 9‑6 for more information onlocation.

9-18 Vehicle Care

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tankpressure cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at thecoolant surge tank.

The coolant surge tank pressurecap can be removed when thecooling system, including the surgetank pressure cap and upperradiator hose, is no longer hot.

1. Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise. If a hiss isheard, wait for that to stop.A hiss means there is still somepressure left.

2. Keep turning the cap andremove it.

Vehicle Care 9-19

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the COLDFILL line.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theupper radiator hose startsgetting hot. Watch out for the

engine cooling fan(s). By thistime, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may belower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper mixture to thecoolant surge tank until the levelreaches the line pointed to onthe front of the coolantsurge tank.

5. Replace the pressure cap.Be sure the pressure cap ishand–tight and full seated.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at thecoolant surge tank.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an indicator to warnof engine overheating. There is anengine coolant temperature warninglight on the vehicle's instrumentpanel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 4‑15.

Decide whether to lift the hoodwhen this warning appears, or getservice help instead.

If lifting the hood , make sure thevehicle is parked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

9-20 Vehicle Care

If Steam Is Coming From TheEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when yourengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam Is Coming FromThe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gageis no longer in the overheat zone oran overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.

Vehicle Care 9-21

Power Steering Fluid(2.4L L4 Engine)The vehicle has electric powersteering and does not use powersteering fluid.

Power Steering Fluid(3.0L V6 Engine)

The power steering fluid reservoiris to the rear of the enginecompartment on the passengerside of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 9‑6 .

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

The power steering fluid does notneed to be checked unless there isa leak in the system. Have thesystem inspected and repaired ifthere is a fluid loss.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check:

1. Turn the engine off and let itcool down.

2. Remove the engine cover. Referto Engine Cover on page 9‑9.

3. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

4. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

5. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

6. Remove the cap again andlook at the fluid level on thedipstick.

The fluid level should be betweenMAX and MIN line at roomtemperature. If the fluid is on orbelow MIN line, add fluid.

What to Use

For the proper fluid, seeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10‑7.

9-22 Vehicle Care

Washer Fluid

What to Use

Read the manufacturer'sinstructions before refilling thewindshield washer fluid. If operatingthe vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it and add washer fluiduntil full. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 9‑6 forreservoir location.

Notice:. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thevehicle's windshield washersystem and paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toan accident. When the brakewear warning sound is heard,have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Vehicle Care 9-23

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 11‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer/retailer if the brakepedal does not return to normalheight, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

9-24 Vehicle Care

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 9‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can alsocause a low fluid level. Have thebrake hydraulic system fixed,since a leak means that sooneror later the brakes will notwork well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings are

installed. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 4‑21.

Vehicle Care 9-25

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10‑7.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice:. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled onthe vehicle's paintedsurfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful notto spill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement number onthe original battery label when anew battery is needed.

{ DANGER

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

9-26 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 9‑74 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

All-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

When to Check and ChangeLubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to check thelubricant and when to change it.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 10‑2.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

If the level is below the bottomof the filler plug hole, located onthe transfer case, you will need toadd some lubricant. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the filler plug hole.A fluid loss could indicate aproblem; check and have itrepaired, if needed.

What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what kind of lubricantto use. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 10‑7.

Vehicle Care 9-27

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 8‑40.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer/retailer for service.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlSystem Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 8‑40.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition to ON/RUN, but do notstart the engine. Withoutapplying the regular brake, try tomove the shift lever out ofP (Park) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of P (Park),contact your dealer/retailer forservice.

9-28 Vehicle Care

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer/retailer ifservice is required.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer/retailer ifservice is required.

Vehicle Care 9-29

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 10‑2 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For proper type andlength, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 10‑9.

Notice: Allowing the wiper bladearm to touch the windshield whenno wiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would not becovered by your warranty. Do notallow the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield.

Front Wiper BladeReplacement

To replace the front wiper blades:

1. Lift the wiper arm from thewindshield until no furthermovement is possible.

2. Press the square button on thetop side, at the end of the wiperarm, and pull the wiper blade outof the end of the wiper arm.

3. Install the wiper blade connectorby sliding into the end of thewiper arm until the square buttonon the wiper blade clicks intoplace with the wiper arm.

4. Place the wiper arm with thewiper blade in place back on thewindshield.

9-30 Vehicle Care

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

To replace the rear wiper blade:

1. Lift the wiper arm from theliftgate glass until no furthermovement is possible.

2. Hold the wiper arm at the tip withone hand and hold the wiperblade at the tip with theother hand.

3. Pull down on the wiper blade.The blade will pull away fromthe arm. 4. Place the wiper blade into the

wiper arm aligning the bladeattachment rivet with the armattachment.

5. Align the wiper blade with thearm and hold both ends of thearm while gently squeezing untilthe blade snaps into place.

Do not apply excessive forceduring this operation.

Reposition the blade in the armand repeat, if blade is notcorrectly positioned.

6. Place the wiper arm with thewiper blade attached back onthe liftgate glass.

Vehicle Care 9-31

Headlamp AimingThe headlamp aiming system hasbeen preset at the factory.

If the vehicle is damaged in anaccident, the aim of the headlampsmay be affected and adjustmentmay be necessary.

It is recommended that a dealer/retailer adjust the headlamps. Tore-aim the headlamps yourself, usethe following procedure.

The vehicle should be properlyprepared as follows. The vehicle:. Should be placed so the

headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft) froma light colored wall.

. Must have all four tires on alevel surface which is level allthe way to the wall.

. Should be placed so it isperpendicular to the wall or otherflat surface.

. Should not have any snow, ice,or mud on it.

. Should be fully assembled andall other work stopped whileheadlamp aiming is beingperformed.

. Should be normally loaded witha full tank of fuel and one personor 75 kg (160 lbs) sitting on thedriver's seat.

. Tires should be properly inflated.

Headlamp aiming is done with thevehicle's low-beam headlamps. Thehigh-beam headlamps will becorrectly aimed if the low-beamheadlamps are aimed properly.

9-32 Vehicle Care

To adjust the vertical aim, do thefollowing:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 9‑5 for more information.

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens ofthe low‐beam headlamp.

3. Measure the distance from theground to the aim dot on thelow‐beam headlamp. Record thedistance.

4. At the wall measure from theground upward (A) to therecorded distance fromStep 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)on the wall the width of thevehicle at the height of the markin Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlampto improve beam cut-off whenaiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to theheadlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beamheadlamps and place a pieceof cardboard or equivalent infront of the headlamp not beingadjusted. This allows only thebeam of light from the headlampbeing adjusted to be seen on theflat surface.

Vehicle Care 9-33

7. Locate the vertical headlampaiming screws, which are underthe hood near each headlampassembly.

The adjustment screw can beturned with a E8 Torx® socket.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screwuntil the headlamp beamis aimed to the horizontal tapeline. Turn it clockwise orcounterclockwise to raise orlower the angle of the beam.

9. Make sure that the light from theheadlamp is positioned at thebottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on theleft (A) shows the correctheadlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrectheadlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 forthe opposite headlamp.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 9‑37.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer/retailer.

9-34 Vehicle Care

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps

A. Low Beam Headlamp

B. High Beam headlamp

C. Park/Turn Signal Lamp

D. Side Marker Lamp

To replace:

1. Turn the tire to reach the accessport cap located on front ofwheel well cover.

A. Screw

B. Access Port Cap

2. Remove screw (A) and turnaccess port cap (B)counterclockwise to remove.

3. If replacing low/high headlampbulb, remove the dust cover capfrom the back of the headlamphousing by turning the capcounterclockwise.

4. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to removefrom lamp assembly.

5. Remove the bulb from thesocket or disconnect bulbassembly from harnessconnector.

6. Install new bulb.

7. Reinstall the lamp socket tolamp assembly turningclockwise.

8. Replace the dust cover cap onheadlamps.

9. Reinstall the wheel well coveraccess port cap and secure byinstalling screw.

Vehicle Care 9-35

Fog LampsTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Locate the fog lamp assemblyunder the front facia.

2. Disconnect the bulb socket fromthe electrical connector, turn andpull out the bulb assembly.

3. Remove the old bulb from thebulb socket and push the newbulb straight into the bulb socketuntil it connects.

4. Push the bulb socket into thefog lamp assembly and turnclockwise to lock it into place.

5. Reconnect the bulb socket to theelectrical connector.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps

A. Sidemarker

B. Stoplamp/Turn Signal Lamp/Taillamp

C. Back-up Lamp

To replace one of these lamps:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate(Manual) on page 1‑8 orLiftgate (Power) on page 1‑9.

A. Screw

B. Screw Cover

2. Remove the two screwcovers (B) from the taillampassembly.

3. Remove the two screws (A)securing the taillamp assembly.

4. Pull taillamp assembly out ofvehicle body.

9-36 Vehicle Care

5. Disconnect the lamp wiringharness.

6. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull it out.

7. Pull the bulb straight out of thesocket.

8. Install the new bulb.

9. Push the bulb socket in and turnit clockwise.

10. Reverse steps 2 through 5 toreinstall lamp assembly.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate partway. SeeLiftgate (Manual) on page 1‑8or Liftgate (Power) onpage 1‑9 for more information.

Passenger side shown, driver sidesimilar

2. Push the left end of the lampassembly towards the right.

3. Pull the lamp assembly down toremove from liftgate.

A. Bulb Socket

B. Bulb

C. Lamp Assembly

4. Turn the bulb socket (A)counterclockwise to remove fromlamp assembly (C).

5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out ofthe bulb socket.

Vehicle Care 9-37

6. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socketand turn the bulb socketclockwise to install into lampassembly.

7. Turn the lamp assembly into theliftgate engaging the clip sidefirst.

8. Push on the lamp side oppositethe clip until the lamp assemblysnaps into place.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-Up Lamp 921

Fog Lamp Front H11

HeadlampHigh Beam

HB3

HeadlampLow Beam

H11

License Plate Lamp W5WLL

Parking Lamp/TurnSignal Front

T20

Sidemarker Frontand Rear

194

Taillamp/Turn SignalLamp/Stop Lamp

3157K

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer/retailer.

Electrical System

FusesThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits byfuses. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureto replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

There are two fuse blocks in thevehicle: one in the enginecompartment and one in theinstrument panel.

There is a fuse puller located in theengine compartment fuse block.See Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 9‑38. It can be usedto easily remove fuses from the fuseblock.

9-38 Vehicle Care

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

To remove the fuse block cover,squeeze the clips on the cover andlift it straight up.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses and relaysshown.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical components on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

J-CaseFuses

Usage

1 Cool Fan 1

2 Cool Fan 2

3 Rear Defog

4PowerWindows – Right

J-CaseFuses

Usage

5Memory SeatModule

6 Power Seat – Left

7Instrument PanelFuse Block 1

Vehicle Care 9-39

J-CaseFuses

Usage


9 Starter

10 Brake Booster

11 Sunroof

12Antilock BrakeSystem Pump


14PowerWindows – Left

15Antilock BrakeSystem Module

Mini Fuses Usage

16TransmissionControl ModuleBattery

17 Trailer Parking Light

Mini Fuses Usage

18 Engine ControlModule Battery

19 Heated Mirror

20 Trailer Left

21 Lift Gate Module

22 Power Lumbar

23 Trailer Right

24 Canister Vent

25Memory MirrorModule

26Regulated VoltageControl BatterySensor

27Rear AccessoryPower Outlet

28 Wiper

29 Rear Wiper

30Air ConditioningCompressor

31 Rear Latch

Mini Fuses Usage

32 Horn

33Right High‐BeamHeadlamp

34Left High‐BeamHeadlamp

35 Ignition Even Coil

36 Ignition Odd Coil

37 Windshield Washer

38 Front Fog Lamps

39Post CatalyticConverter OxygenSensor

40Engine ControlModule

41Pre–CatalyticConverter OxygenSensor

42TransmissionControl Module

43 Mirror

9-40 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuses Usage

44 Chassis ControlModule Ignition

45 Spare

46 Rear Drive Module

47Lift Gate ModuleLogic

48Instrument PanelFuse Block Ignition

49 Heated Seat – Front

50Chassis ControlModule

51 Engine ControlModule

52 Rear Vision Camera

Midi Fuse Usage

53Electric PowerSteering

MicroRelays

Usage

54 Rear Defogger

55 Cooling Fan Low

56Head LampHigh Beam

57 Cooling Fan Control

58Wiper On/OffControl

59Air ConditioningCompressor

60 Wiper Speed

61 Fog Lamp

62 Engine Control

63 Starter

64 Run/Crank

Mini Relays Usage

65 Cooling Fan High

66 Brake Booster

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block islocated on the passenger side panelof the center console. To access thefuses, open the fuse panel doorfrom the passenger side by pullingit out.

To reinstall the door, insert the tabson the bottom of the door into theconsole first, then push the doorback into its original location.

Vehicle Care 9-41

The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

Mini Fuses Usage

1 Steering Wheel DM

2 Spare

3 Spare

Mini Fuses Usage

4Body ControlModule 1

5 Infotainment


Mini Fuses Usage

7 Noise ControlModule


9 Radio

10 SEO Battery

11Ultrasonic RearParking Aid Module

12Heater, Ventilationand Air ConditioningBattery

13 Auxiliary PowerFront

14Heater, Ventilationand Air ConditioningIgnition

15 Display


17AuxiliaryPower Rear

9-42 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuses Usage

18 Instrument PanelCluster Ignition

19 PDI Module


21SEO RetainedAccessory Power

22 SDM Ignition

23 Spare

24 Spare

25 PRNDL

26 Spare

27 Spare

28 Spare


Mini Fuses Usage

31 Amplifier

32Discrete LogicIgnition Switch

33CommunicationsIntegration Module


35 SDM Battery

36Data LinkConnection

37Instrument PanelCluster Battery

38IOS Module(Passenger SensingSystem)

39 Spare

J‐CaseFuses

Usage

29 Front Blower Motor


Relays Usage

41 LOG Relay

42Retained AccessoryPower Relay

Vehicle Care 9-43

Wheels and Tires

TiresYour new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. If youever have questions about yourtire warranty and where toobtain service, see your vehicleWarranty booklet for details. Foradditional information refer tothe tire manufacturer.

{ WARNING

Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous.

. Overloading your tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Youcould have an air-out and aserious accident. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 8‑24.

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when yourtires are cold. See TirePressure on page 9‑50.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, puncturedor broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenyou hit a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

. Worn, old tires can causeaccidents. If your tread isbadly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged,replace them.

9-44 Vehicle Care

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance withthe U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is the

Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 9‑61 .

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Vehicle Care 9-45

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire has a tread life ofapproximately 5 000 km(3,000 miles) and should not bedriven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact sparetire is for emergency use when a

regular road tire has lost airand gone flat. If your vehiclehas a compact spare tire,see Compact Spare Tire onpage 9‑73 and If a Tire Goes Flaton page 9‑64 .

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code isthe Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 9‑50 .

(F) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

9-46 Vehicle Care

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following illustration showsan example of a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or biasply construction; and the letter Bmeans belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description:These characters representthe load index and speed ratingof the tire. The load indexrepresents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified tocarry. The speed rating is themaximum speed a tire iscertified to carry a load.

Vehicle Care 9-47

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal).

Accessory Weight: Thismeans the combined weightof optional accessories.Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatictransmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows,power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 9‑50 .

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 8‑24 .

9-48 Vehicle Care

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 8‑24 .

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 8‑24 .

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire:A tire used on light duty trucksand some multipurposepassenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 8‑24 .

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 9‑50 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 8‑24 .

Vehicle Care 9-49

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across thetread of a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 inch) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 9‑58 .

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards):A tire information system thatprovides consumers withratings for a tire's traction,temperature, and treadwear.Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 9‑61 .

Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 8‑24 .

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle'scapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 8‑24 .

9-50 Vehicle Care

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tellyou that under‐inflation orover‐inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not haveenough air (under‐inflation),you can get the following:. Too much flexing. Too much heat. Tire overloading. Premature orirregular wear

. Poor handling

. Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air(over‐inflation), you can getthe following:. Unusual wear. Poor handling. Rough ride. Needless damage fromroad hazards

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to your vehicle. Thislabel shows your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amount ofair pressure needed to supportyour vehicle's maximum loadcarrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weightyour vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 8‑24 . Howyou load your vehicle affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more. Do not forget to checkthe compact spare tire, if thevehicle has one. The compactspare should be at 60 psi(420 kPa). For additionalinformation regarding thecompact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 9‑73 .

Vehicle Care 9-51

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegage to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey are under‐inflated. Checkthe tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. Cold meansyour vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven nomore than 1.6 km (1 mile).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.

If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release airby pushing on the metal stemin the center of the tire valve.Re‐check the tire pressure withthe tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems. Theyhelp prevent leaks by keepingout dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your vehicle'stires and transmit tire pressurereadings to a receiver located in thevehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

9-52 Vehicle Care

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a lowtire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under‐inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 9‑53 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry and Science Canada

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 12‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industryand Science Canada.

Vehicle Care 9-53

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe vehicle's tires and transmit thetire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument panelcluster.

At the same time a message tocheck the pressure in a specific tireappears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) display. The low tirepressure warning light and the DICwarning message come on at eachignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed bythe driver. For additional informationand details about the DIC operationand displays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 4‑27.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as you start to drive. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure in the tire(s) are gettinglow and need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressure for yourvehicle's tires when they are cold.

See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 8‑24, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location on your vehicle.Also see Tire Pressure onpage 9‑50.

Your vehicle's TPMS can warn youabout a low tire pressure conditionbut it does not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 9‑56, Tire Rotation onpage 9‑56 and Tires on page 9‑43.

Notice: Liquid tire sealants coulddamage the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors. Sensordamage caused by using a tiresealant is not covered by yourwarranty. Do not use liquid tiresealants.

9-54 Vehicle Care

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message isalso displayed. The low tire warninglight and DIC warning messagecome on at each ignition cycle untilthe problem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause themalfunction light and DIC messageto come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The TPMSmalfunction light and DICmessage should go off once youre‐install the road tire containingthe TPMS sensor.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was started but notcompleted or not completedsuccessfully after rotating thevehicle's tires. The DIC messageand TPMS malfunction lightshould go off once the TPMSsensor matching process isperformed successfully. See“TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess” later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. The DICmessage and the TPMSmalfunction light should go offwhen the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer/retailer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match your vehicle's originalequipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than thoserecommended for your vehiclecould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 9‑58.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning itcannot detect or signal a low tirecondition. See your dealer/retailerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.

Vehicle Care 9-55

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. Any time yourotate your vehicle's tires or replaceone or more of the TPMS sensors,the identification codes will need tobe matched to the new tire/wheelposition. The sensors are matchedto the tire/wheel positions in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side reartire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your dealer/retailer for service.

The TPMS sensors can also bematched to each tire/wheel positionby increasing or decreasing thetire's air pressure. If increasing the

tire's air pressure, do not exceedthe maximum inflation pressureindicated on the tire's sidewall.

To decrease air-pressure out of atire you can use the pointed end ofthe valve cap, a pencil-style airpressure gage, or a key.

You have two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takes longerthan two minutes, to match the firsttire and wheel, or more thanfive minutes to match all four tireand wheel positions the matchingprocess stops and you need tostart over.

The TPMS sensor matching processis outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch toON/RUN with the engine off.

3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter's lock andunlock buttons at the same timefor approximately five seconds.The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand Tire Learning Activemessage displays on the DICscreen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

9-56 Vehicle Care

5. Remove the valve cap from thevalve cap stem. Activate theTPMS sensor by increasing ordecreasing the tire's air pressurefor five seconds, or until ahorn chirp sounds. The hornchirp, which may take up to30 seconds to sound, confirmsthat the sensor identificationcode has been matched to thistire and wheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 5. The horn soundstwo times to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The Tire Learning Activemessage on the DIC displayscreen goes off.

9. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

11. Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that youregularly inspect your vehicle'stires, including the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, for signsof wear or damage. See When ItIs Time for New Tires onpage 9‑58 for more information.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every8 000 to 13 000 km (5,000 to8,000 miles). See ScheduledMaintenance on page 10‑2 .

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on the vehicle.This will ensure that the vehiclecontinues to perform most like itdid when the tires were new.

Vehicle Care 9-57

Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate the tires as soon aspossible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 9‑58 and WheelReplacement on page 9‑63 .

When rotating the vehicle's tires,always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

After the tires have beenrotated, adjust the front and rearinflation pressures as shown onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Tire Pressure onpage 9‑50 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 8‑24 .

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 9‑53 .

Make certain that all wheel nutsare properly tightened. See“Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 11‑2 .

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 9‑64.

9-58 Vehicle Care

When It Is Time for NewTiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures, drivingspeeds, vehicle loading, and roadconditions influence when you neednew tires.

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which appear when thetires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) orless of tread remaining.

The vehicle needs new tires if anyof the following statements are true:. You can see the indicators at

three or more places aroundthe tire.

. You can see cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall is cracked,cut, or snagged deep enough toshow cord or fabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannot berepaired well because of the sizeor location of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades overtime. This is also true for the sparetire, if the vehicle has one, evenif it is not being used. Multipleconditions affect how fast this agingtakes place, including temperatures,loading conditions, and inflationpressure maintenance. With propercare and maintenance tires typically

wear out before they degrade due toage. If you are unsure about theneed to replace the tires as they getolder, consult the tire manufacturerfor more information.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for your vehicle.The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, whenit was new, were designed tomeet General Motors TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. If you needreplacement tires, GM stronglyrecommends that you get tireswith the same TPC Spec rating.This way, your vehicle willcontinue to have tires that aredesigned to give the sameperformance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as theoriginal tires.

Vehicle Care 9-59

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over adozen critical specifications thatimpact the overall performanceof your vehicle, including brakesystem performance, ride andhandling, traction control, andtire pressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by an MS formud and snow. See TireSidewall Labeling on page 9‑44for additional information.

GM recommends replacing tiresin sets of four. This is becauseuniform tread depth on all tireswill help keep your vehicleperforming most like it did whenthe tires were new. Replacingless than a full set of tires canaffect the braking and handlingperformance of your vehicle.

See Tire Inspection on page 9‑56and Tire Rotation on page 9‑56for information on proper tirerotation.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires could cause youto lose control while driving.If you mix tires of differentsizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), thevehicle may not handleproperly, and you could havea crash. Using tires of differentsizes, brands, or types mayalso cause damage to yourvehicle. Be sure to use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels. It isall right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, asit was developed for use onyour vehicle. See CompactSpare Tire on page 9‑73 .

{ WARNING

If you use bias-ply tires on thevehicle, the wheel rim flangescould develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could failsuddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace yourvehicle's tires with those that donot have a TPC Spec number,make sure they are the samesize, load range, speed rating,and construction type (radial andbias‐belted tires) as yourvehicle's original tires.

9-60 Vehicle Care

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow‐pressure warning if non‐TPCSpec rated tires are installedon your vehicle. Non‐TPCSpec rated tires may give alow‐pressure warning that ishigher or lower than the properwarning level you would get withTPC Spec rated tires. See TirePressure Monitor System onpage 9‑51 .

Your vehicle's originalequipment tires are listed onthe Tire and Loading InformationLabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 8‑24 , for moreinformation about the Tire andLoading Information Label andits location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are adifferent size than your originalequipment wheels and tires, thiscould affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking, rideand handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle haselectronic systems such as anti‐lockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.

{ WARNING

If you add different sizedwheels, your vehicle may notprovide an acceptable level ofperformance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheelsare selected. You may increasethe chance that you will crash andsuffer serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for your vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 9‑58 and Accessories andModifications on page 9‑3 foradditional information.

Vehicle Care 9-61

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls of

most passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver, or temporaryuse spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of25 to 30 cm (10 to 12 inches),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions ona specified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1.5) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations indriving habits, service practices,and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

9-62 Vehicle Care

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades areA (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a levelof performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance onthe laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.It should be noted that thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels on the vehiclewere aligned and balanced carefullyat the factory to give the longest tirelife and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment andtire balancing will not be necessaryon a regular basis. However, if thereis unusual tire wear or the vehiclepulls to one side or the other, thealignment should be checked. If thevehicle vibrates when driving on asmooth road, the tires and wheelsmight need to be rebalanced. Seeyour dealer/retailer for properdiagnosis.

Vehicle Care 9-63

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it(except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired).See your dealer/retailer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know thekind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

If you need to replace any of thewheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,or Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors, replace them onlywith new GM original equipmentparts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts,wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors forthe vehicle.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires lose airand make you lose control. Youcould have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 9‑64 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Putting a used wheel on thevehicle is dangerous. You cannotknow how it has been used orhow far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause acrash. If you have to replace awheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

9-64 Vehicle Care

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts.The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and you orothers may be injured in a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on thevehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Tohelp avoid damage to the vehicle,drive slowly, readjust or removethe device if it is contacting thevehicle, and do not spin the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

vehicle's wheels. If you do findtraction devices that will fit, installthem on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile you are driving, especially ifyou maintain your vehicle's tiresproperly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop well out of thetraffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rearblowout remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It maybe very bumpy and noisy, but youcan still steer. Gently brake to astop, well off the road if possible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

Vehicle Care 9-65

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 5‑2.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fall onyou or other people. You and theycould be badly injured or evenkilled. Find a level place tochange your tire. To help preventthe vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission shift lever inP (Park), or shift a manualtransmission to 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

To be certain the vehicle will notmove, put blocks at the front andrear of the tire farthest away fromthe one being changed. Thatwould be the tire on the otherside, at the opposite end of thevehicle.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

9-66 Vehicle Care

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

To access the spare tire and tools:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate(Manual) on page 1‑8 orLiftgate (Power) on page 1‑9.

2. Lift the load floor up.

3. Remove the extension (A),wheel wrench (B) and jack (C).

Place the tools next to the tirebeing changed.

4. Turn the retainer nutcounterclockwise and removethe spare tire.

5. Place the spare tire next to thetire being changed.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 9‑64 for moreinformation.

2. For vehicles with wheel nutcaps, turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen andremove them.

Do not try to remove plastic capsfrom the cover or center cap.

3. For vehicles with a wheel coveror center cap, pull the cover orcenter cap away from the wheelto remove it. Store the wheelcover in the cargo area until youhave the flat tire repaired orreplaced.

Vehicle Care 9-67

4. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen allthe wheel nuts, but do notremove them yet.

5. Place the jack near the flat tire.

Notice: Make sure that the jacklift head is in the correct positionor you may damage your vehicle.The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty.

Front

Rear

6. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest the flat tire.The location is indicated by amark on the bottom edge of thefront and rear door plasticmolding. The jack must not beused in any other position.

9-68 Vehicle Care

Place the jack notch (A) underthe frame rail seam (B).

7. Put the compact spare tirenear you.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising your vehicle with thejack improperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

8. Fit the jack handle extensiononto the jack by sliding the hookthrough the end of the jack.

Vehicle Care 9-69

9. Insert the other end of the jackhandle into the wrench.

10. Place the jack under thevehicle.

11. Raise the vehicle by turning thejack handle clockwise. Raisethe vehicle far enough off theground so there is enoughroom for the road tire to clearthe ground.

9-70 Vehicle Care

12. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

13. Remove the flat tire.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or a

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

paper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 9‑64.

14. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

15. Place the compact spare tireon the wheel-mounting surface.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

16. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

17. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handlecounterclockwise.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by the

(Continued)

Vehicle Care 9-71

WARNING (Continued)

aftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 11‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 11‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

19. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

20. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench.

When reinstalling the wheel cover orcenter cap on the full-size tire,tighten all five plastic caps handsnug with the aid of the wheelwrench and tighten them with thewheel wrench an additional one‐quarter of a turn.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton your vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

9-72 Vehicle Care

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store the flat tire:

1. Remove the cable package. Thecable is stored in a plastic bagunder the compact spare tire.

2. Remove the small center cap bytapping the back of the cap withthe extension of the shaft, if thevehicle has aluminum wheels.

3. Put the flat tire in the rearstorage area with the valve stempointing toward the rear of thevehicle.

4. Pull the cable (A) through thedoor striker (D) then the centerof the wheel (C).

Vehicle Care 9-73

5. Hook the cable onto the outsideportion of the liftgate hinges (B).

6. Hook the other end of the cableonto the outside portion of theliftgate hinge on the other side ofthe vehicle.

7. Pull on the cable to make sure itis secure.

8. Make sure the metal tube iscentered at the striker. Push thetube toward the front of thevehicle.

9. Close the liftgate and make sureit is latched properly.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can.

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire it was fully inflated when thevehicle was new, however, it canlose air after a time. Check theinflation pressure regularly. It shouldbe 420 kPa (60 psi).

After installing the compact spareon the vehicle, stop as soon aspossible and make sure the sparetire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to performwell at speeds up to 105 km/h(65 mph) for distances up to5 000 km (3,000 miles), so you canfinish your trip and have the full-sizetire repaired or replaced at your

9-74 Vehicle Care

convenience. Of course, it is best toreplace the spare with a full-size tireas soon as possible. The spare tirewill last longer and be in goodshape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compactspare is installed, do not takethe vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.

Jump StartingJump starting can be used onvehicles with run‐down batteries byusing jumper cables and anothervehicle.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

{ WARNING

Using an open flame near abattery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurtdoing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

Vehicle Care 9-75

Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely. Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage to thevehicle that would not be coveredby the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will not work,and it could damage the vehicle.

Notice: If you leave the radio orother accessories on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessories whenjump starting the vehicle.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

1. The vehicle used to jump startmust have 12-volt battery with anegative ground.

Notice: If the other vehicle'ssystem is not a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Onlyuse vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jumpstart your vehicle.

2. The vehicles should be closeenough for the jumper cables toreach, but the vehicles shouldnot be touching. Touching couldcause grounding and possibleelectrical system damage.

Put both vehicles in P (Park)and set the parking brake firmly.

3. Unplug accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or theaccessory power outlet. Turn offthe radio and all lamps that arenot needed. Turn off the ignitionon both vehicles.

9-76 Vehicle Care

4. Locate the positive (+) andnegative (−) terminals on bothvehicles. Some vehicles haveremote jump starting terminals.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

5. The remote positive (+)terminal (A) is located on theunderhood fuse block, on thedriver side. Lift the red cap touncover the terminal.

The remote negative (−)terminal (B) is a stud behind themetal tab stamped with GND (−)near the driver side strut tower.

6. The jumper cables should be ingood working condition with noloose or missing insulation. Thevehicles could be damaged ifthey are not.

7. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

8. Do not let the other endtouch metal. Connect it tothe positive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

9. Connect the black negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminalof the good battery. Use aremote negative (−) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (−) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery.

Vehicle Care 9-77

10. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable away fromthe dead battery, but not nearengine parts that move.

11. Start the vehicle with the goodbattery and run the engine.

12. Press the unlock symbol onthe remote keyless entrytransmitter to disarm thesecurity system, if equipped.

13. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, it needsservice.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the underhood fuse blockcover to its original position,if applicable.

9-78 Vehicle Care

Towing

Towing the VehicleTo avoid damage, the disabledvehicle should be towed with allfour wheels off the ground. Consultyour dealer/retailer or a professionaltowing service if the disabledvehicle must be towed. SeeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 12‑6.

To tow the vehicle behindanother vehicle for recreationalpurposes — such as behind amotorhome, see RecreationalVehicle Towing following.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most commontypes of recreational vehicle towingare known as dinghy towing anddolly towing. Dinghy towing istowing the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground. Dolly towingis towing the vehicle with twowheels on the ground and twowheels up on a device known as adolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity

of the towing vehicle? Besure to read the towvehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer/retailer or traileringprofessional for additionaladvice and equipmentrecommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Vehicle Care 9-79

Dinghy Towing

Front-wheel‐drive andall-wheel-drive vehicles may bedinghy towed from the front. Thesevehicles can also be towed byplacing them on a platform trailerwith all four wheels off of theground. For other towing options,see “Dolly Towing” following in thissection.

For vehicles being dinghy towed,the vehicle should be run at thebeginning of each day and at eachRV fuel stop for about five minutes.This will ensure proper lubrication oftransmission components.

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle that will betowed and secure it to thetowing vehicle.

2. Turn the ignition key toACC/ACCESSORY.

3. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

4. Turn all accessories off.

5. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle isbeing towed, remove fuse 32,the Discrete Logic IgnitionSwitch fuse, from the instrumentpanel fuse block and store it in asafe location. See InstrumentPanel Fuse Block on page 9‑40.

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwithout performing each of thesteps listed under “DinghyTowing,” the automatictransmission could be damaged.Be sure to follow all steps of thedinghy towing procedure prior toand after towing the vehicle.

Notice: If 105 km/h (65mph) isexceeded while towing thevehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 105 km/h (65mph)while towing the vehicle.

9-80 Vehicle Care

Once the destination has beenreached:


2. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Install fuse 32, the DiscreteLogic Ignition Switch fuse. SeeInstrument Panel Fuse Block onpage 9‑40.

5. Start the engine and let it idle formore than three minutes beforedriving the vehicle.

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage thetransmission. Be sure that thetransmission fluid is at the properlevel before towing with all fourwheels on the ground.

Notice: Do not tow a vehicle withthe front drive wheels on theground if one of the front tires isa compact spare tire. Towing withtwo different tire sizes on thefront of the vehicle can causesevere damage to thetransmission.

Dolly Towing (All-Wheel‐DriveVehicles)

All-wheel‐drive vehicles should notbe towed with two wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed ona platform trailer with all four wheelsoff of the ground or dinghy towedfrom the front.

Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles)

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith the rear wheels on the ground,do the following:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).


Vehicle Care 9-81

4. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

5. Follow the dolly manufacturer'sinstructions for preparing thevehicle and dolly for towing.

6. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle Fromthe Rear

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth and a car washing soap toclean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washingthe Vehicle” later in this section.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer.

9-82 Vehicle Care

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always usewaxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To keepthe paint finish looking new, keepthe vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Wash with water or usechrome polish on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminumtrim. To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam or caustic soap toclean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,keep it clean by washing it often.

Do not wash the vehicle indirect sunlight and use a carwashing soap.

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that itshould not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and itwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that containacid or abrasives, as they candamage the paint, metal or plasticon the vehicle. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessary

Vehicle Care 9-83

safety precautions and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

High pressure car washes couldcause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 inches) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8,274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Notice: Conveyor systems onsome automatic car washes coulddamage the vehicle. There maynot be enough clearance for theundercarriage. Check with the carwash manager before using theautomatic car wash.

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth.During very cold, damp weatherfrequent application may berequired. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 10‑7.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

The vehicle may have eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a softclean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a softclean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium, calciumor sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the vehicle'schrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Notice: Using strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use only approvedcleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surface of thevehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,abrasive cleaners, cleaners withacid, or abrasive cleaning brushes

9-84 Vehicle Care

on them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chromepolish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish onaluminum wheels could damagethe wheels. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only onchrome-plated wheels, but avoidany painted surface of the wheel,and buff off immediately afterapplication.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lintfree cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluid or amild detergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper bladesif they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:. Extreme dusty conditions. Sand and salt. Heat and sun. Snow and ice, without proper

removal

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Vehicle Care 9-85

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer/retailer.Larger areas of finish damage canbe corrected in your dealer's/retailer's body and paint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbody withplain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frameshould be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer/retailer or anunderbody car washing system cando this.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareThe vehicle's interior will continue tolook its best if it is cleaned often.Dust and dirt can accumulate on theupholstery and cause damage tothe carpet, fabric, leather, andplastic surfaces. Stains should beremoved quickly as extreme heatcould cause them to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors mayrequire more frequent cleaning.Newspapers and garments that cantransfer color to home furnishingscan also transfer color to thevehicle's interior.

Remove dust from small buttonsand knobs with a small brush withsoft bristles.

9-86 Vehicle Care

Your dealer/retailer has products forcleaning the vehicle's interior. Whencleaning the vehicle's interior, onlyuse cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces that are beingcleaned. Permanent damage canresult from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were notintended. Apply the cleaner directlyto the cleaning cloth to preventover-spray. Remove any accidentalover-spray from other surfacesimmediately.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage to therear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Cleaners can contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in thevehicle's interior. Before usingcleaners, read and adhere to allsafety instructions on the label.While cleaning the vehicle's interior,maintain adequate ventilation byopening the vehicle's doors andwindows.

Do not clean the interior using thefollowing cleaners or techniques:. Never use a knife or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a stiff brush. It cancause damage to the vehicle'sinterior surfaces.

. Never apply heavy pressure orrub aggressively with a cleaningcloth. Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and doesnot improve the effectiveness ofsoil removal.

. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.Avoid laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too muchsoap will leave a residue thatleaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) ofwater is a good guide.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery while cleaning.

. Damage to the vehicle's interiormay result from the use of manyorganic solvents such as naptha,alcohol, etc.

Vehicle Care 9-87

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment to remove dustand loose dirt. A canister vacuumwith a beater bar in the nozzle mayonly be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils,always try to remove them first withplain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much ofthe soil as possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. For liquids: gently blot the

remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until nomore can be removed.

. For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub thesoiled area.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If the locallycleaned area gives any impressionthat a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

A paper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture from the fabric orcarpet after the cleaning process.

Leather

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can beused. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat, steam,or spot lifters or spot removers,or shoe polish on leather. Manycommercial leather cleanersand coatings that are sold topreserve and protect leathermay permanently change theappearance and feel of the leatherand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the vehicle's interiorbecause they can alter theappearance by increasing the glossin a non-uniform manner.

9-88 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters orremovers on plastic surfaces.Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserveand protect soft plastic surfacesmay permanently change theappearance and feel of the interiorand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the vehicle's interiorbecause they can alter theappearance by increasing the glossin a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Service and Maintenance 10-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance . . . . . 10-2

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 10-10

General InformationNotice: Maintenance intervals,checks, inspections,recommended fluids, andlubricants are necessary to keepthis vehicle in good workingcondition. Damage caused byfailure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions forbetter air quality.

Because of all the different wayspeople use vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. The vehicle might needmore frequent checks and services.Please read the information underScheduled Maintenance. To keepthe vehicle in good condition, seeyour dealer/retailer.

The maintenance schedule is forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 8‑24.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

10-2 Service and Maintenance

. Are driven off-road in therecommended manner. SeeOff-Road Driving on page 8‑8.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 8‑54.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous. Some jobs cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-howand the proper tools andequipment. If in doubt, see yourdealer/retailer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. SeeDoing Your Own Service Work onpage 9‑4 .

At your General Motorsdealer/retailer, you can be certainthat you will receive the highestlevel of service available. Your

dealer/retailer has specially trainedservice technicians, uses genuineGM replacement parts, as well as,up to date tools and equipment toensure fast and accuratediagnostics.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to use arelisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10‑7 andMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 10‑9. We recommend the useof genuine parts from yourdealer/retailer.

Rotation of New Tires

To maintain ride, handling, andperformance of the vehicle, it isimportant that the first rotationservice for new tires be performedwhen they have 8 000 to 13 000 km(5,000 to 8,000 miles). See TireRotation on page 9‑56.

ScheduledMaintenanceWhen the Change Engine OilSoon Message Displays

Change engine oil and filter. SeeEngine Oil on page 9‑10. AnEmission Control Service.

When the Change Engine Oil Soonmessage displays, service isrequired for the vehicle as soonas possible, within the next1 000 km/600 miles. If driving underthe best conditions, the engine oillife system might not indicate theneed for vehicle service for morethan a year. The engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once ayear and the oil life system mustbe reset. Your dealer/retailer hastrained service technicians who willperform this work and reset thesystem. If the engine oil life systemis reset accidentally, service thevehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 milessince the last service. Reset the oil


life system whenever the oil ischanged. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 9‑12.

When the Change Engine Oil Soonmessage displays, certain services,checks, and inspections arerequired. The services described forMaintenance I should be performedat every engine oil change. Theservices described for MaintenanceII should be performed when:. Maintenance I was performed

the last time the engine oil waschanged.

. It has been 10 months or moresince the Change Engine OilSoon message has displayed orsince the last service.

Maintenance I. Change engine oil and filter.

See Engine Oil on page 9‑10.An Emission Control Service.

. Engine coolant level check.See Engine Coolant onpage 9‑16.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 9‑22.

. Tire inflation check. See TirePressure on page 9‑50.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 9‑56.

. Rotate tires. See Tire Rotationon page 9‑56.

. Fluids visual leak check(or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). A leak in anysystem must be repaired and thefluid level checked.

. Engine air cleaner filterinspection (vehicles driven industy conditions only). SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 9‑13.

. Brake system inspection (orevery 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).

Maintenance II. Perform all services described in

Maintenance I.. Steering and suspension

inspection. Visual inspection fordamaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear.

. Engine cooling systeminspection. Visual inspectionof hoses, pipes, fittings, andclamps and replacement,if needed.

. Windshield wiper bladeinspection for wear, cracking,or contamination and windshieldand wiper blade cleaning,if contaminated. See ExteriorCare on page 9‑81. Wornor damaged wiper bladereplacement. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 9‑29.


. Body hinges and latches,key lock cylinders, foldingseat hardware, and sunroof(if equipped) lubrication.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 10‑7.More frequent lubrication maybe required when vehicle isexposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying siliconegrease on weatherstrips with aclean cloth makes them lastlonger, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

. Restraint system componentcheck. See Safety SystemCheck on page 2‑24.

. Automatic transmission fluidlevel check and adding fluid,if needed. See AutomaticTransmission Fluid onpage 9‑13.

. Engine air cleaner filterinspection. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 9‑13.

Additional Required Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Engine oil level check.

See Engine Oil on page 9‑10.. Engine coolant level check.

See Engine Coolant onpage 9‑16.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 9‑22.

Once a Month. Tire inflation check. See Tire

Pressure on page 9‑50.. Tire wear inspection. See Tire

Inspection on page 9‑56.

Once a Year. See Starter Switch Check on

page 9‑27.. See Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Control SystemCheck on page 9‑27.

. See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 9‑28.

. See Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check onpage 9‑28.

. Engine cooling system andpressure cap pressure check.Radiator and air conditioningcondenser outside cleaning.See Cooling System onpage 9‑15.

. Exhaust system and nearby heatshields inspection for loose ordamaged components.

. Accelerator pedal check fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.


First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 40 000 km/25,000Miles. Fuel system inspection for

damage or leaks.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 80 000 km/50,000Miles. Engine air cleaner filter

replacement. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 9‑13.

. Automatic transmission fluidchange (severe service) forvehicles mainly driven in heavycity traffic in hot weather, in hillyor mountainous terrain, whenfrequently towing a trailer,or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid onpage 9‑13.

. Transfer case fluid change(severe service) for vehiclesmainly driven in hilly ormountainous terrain, whenfrequently towing a trailer,or used for taxi, police,or delivery service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 160 000 km/100,000Miles. Automatic transmission fluid

change (normal service). SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid onpage 9‑13.

. Transfer case fluid change(normal service).

. Spark plug replacement. AnEmission Control Service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 240 000 km/150,000Miles. Engine cooling system drain,

flush, and refill, cooling systemand cap pressure check, andcleaning of outside of radiatorand air conditioning condenser(or every 5 years, whicheveroccurs first). See CoolingSystem on page 9‑15. AnEmission Control Service.

. Engine accessory drive beltinspection for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage andreplacement, if needed. AnEmission Control Service.


Service Maintenance IMaintenance

II

Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. • •

Engine coolant level check. • •

Windshield washer fluid level check. • •

Tire inflation pressures check. • •

Tire wear inspection. • •

Rotate tires. • •

Fluids visual leak check. • •

Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only). • •

Brake system inspection. • •

Steering and suspension inspection. •

Engine cooling system inspection. •

Windshield wiper blades inspection. •

Body components lubrication. •

Restraint system components check. •

Automatic transmission fluid level check. •

Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions). •


Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays theAmerican Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburstsymbol. To determine the proper viscosity for the vehicle's engine, seeEngine Oil on page 9‑10.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 9‑16.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,in Canada 89021320).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Hydraulic Power Steering System(V6 engines only) DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.


Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88861950, in Canada 88861951).

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood, Door, and Folding Seat HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Power Liftgate Actuator Ball JointMulti-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021668,in Canada 89021674).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).


Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your retailer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 25899727 A3138C

Engine Oil Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G

3.0L V6 Engine 89017524 PF48

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 19130294 CF177

Spark Plugs

2.4L L4 Engine 12620540 41-108

3.0L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 60 cm (23.6 in) 20794123 —

Passenger Side – 42.5 cm (16.7 in) 20794124 —

Rear – 32.5 cm (12.8 in) 25788783 —


Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Date OdometerReading


Technical Data 11-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 11-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VINis the engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 11‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Model designation. Paint information. Production options and special

equipment

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.

11-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label locatedunder the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more

information.

Engine Cooling System

2.4L L4 Engine 7.8 L 8.2 qt

3.0L V6 Engine 10.2 L 10.8 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt

3.0L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank

2.4L L4 Engine 71.1 L 18.8 gal

3.0L V6 Engine 79.1 L 20.9 gal

Technical Data 11-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Transmission Fluid (Drain and Refill)

2.4L L4 6–Speed Automatic* 8.5 L 9.0 qt

3.0L V6 6–Speed Automatic* 9.0 L 9.5 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 170Y 125 ft lb

*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 9‑13 for information on checking fluid level.

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.4L L4 W Automatic 0.9 mm (0.035 in)

3.0L V6 Y Automatic 1.1 mm (0.043 in)

11-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.4L L4 Engine

3.0L V6 Engine

Customer Information 12-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 12-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 12-5GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8

Collision Damage Repair . . . 12-10Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 12-12

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 12-15OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 12-16Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 12-16

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by the dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the generalmanager.

12-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO : If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer CommunicationCentre at 1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer AssistanceRepresentative:. Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN). This is available from thevehicle registration or title, orthe plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line Program toenforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout of court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and your

case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write themat the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.


STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,General Motors of Canada Limitedwants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors CustomerCommunication Centre,1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesChevrolet encourages customersto call the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States — CustomerAssistance

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)


From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada — CustomerAssistance

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7gmcanada.com

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas — CustomerAssistance

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands) — CustomerAssistance

General Motors de Mexico, S.de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY userin the U.S. can communicatewith Chevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-CHEV (2438).(TTY users in Canada can dial1-800-263-3830.)


Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center (U.S.) —www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more. Online service and maintenance

records. Find Chevrolet dealers for

service nationwide. Exclusive privileges and offers. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle. OnStar® and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries

Other Helpful Links:

Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com

Chevrolet Merchandise —www.chevymall.com

Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter. FAQ. Contact Us

My GM Canada(Canada) — www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuabletools and services you will haveaccess to:. My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

. My Dealers/Retailers: Savedetails such as address andphone number for each of yourpreferred GM dealers/retailers.

. My Driveway: Access quicklinks to parts and serviceestimates, check trade-invalues, or schedule a serviceappointment by adding thevehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

. My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM Canadasection within www.gm.ca.


GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program, available to qualifiedapplicants for cost reimbursementof eligible aftermarket adaptiveequipment required for yourvehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift for thevehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer visit gmmobility.com or call theGM Mobility Assistance Center at1-800-323-9935. Text telephone(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada alsohas a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S. purchased vehicles,call 1‐800‐CHEV‐USA(1‐800‐243‐8872); (Text telephone(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number. Telephone number of your

location. Location of the vehicle. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided up to5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the rightto limit services or payment to an


owner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service isprovided to unlock the vehicle ifyou are locked out. A remoteunlock may be available if youhave OnStar®. For securityreasons, the driver must presentidentification before this serviceis given.

. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service isprovided to change a flat tirewith the spare tire. The sparetire, if equipped, must be in goodcondition and properly inflated.It is the owner's responsibility forthe repair or replacement of thetire if it is not covered by thewarranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service isprovided to jump start a deadbattery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting or

changing of snow tires, chains,or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific to CanadianPurchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. There is alimit of six requests per year.Additional travel information isalso available. Allow threeweeks for delivery.


. Trip Interruption Benefitsand Assistance: Must beover 250 kilometres fromwhere your trip was started toqualify. General Motors ofCanada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copyof the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help you make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may giveyou permission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the originalreceipt to Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen your vehicle requireswarranty service, contact yourdealer/retailer and request anappointment. By scheduling aservice appointment and advisingyour service consultant of yourtransportation needs, yourdealer/retailer can help minimizeyour inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it untilit can be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please callyour dealership/retailer, let themknow this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer/retailer requests you tobring the vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for thesame day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with the NewVehicle Limited Warranty (BaseWarranty Coverage period inCanada) and extended powertrain,and hybrid specific warranty in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several courtesy transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing your inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.


Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideyou with shuttle service to get youto your destination with minimalinterruption of your daily schedule.This includes one‐way or round tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters of thedealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead of thedealer's shuttle service, the expensemust be supported by originalreceipts and can only be up to themaximum amount allowed by GMfor shuttle service. In addition, forU.S. customers, should you arrangetransportation through a friend orrelative, limited reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses maybe available. Claim amountsshould reflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.See your dealer for informationregarding the allowance amountsfor reimbursement of fuel or othertransportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warrantyrepair. Rental reimbursement will belimited and must be supported byoriginal receipts. This requiresthat you sign and complete arental agreement and meetstate/provincial, local, and rentalvehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card,etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike-vehicle as a courtesy rental.


Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements willbe administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves theright to unilaterally modify,change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish your vehicle'sresale value, and safetyperformance can be compromisedin subsequent collisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which your vehiclewas originally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are your best choiceto ensure that your vehicle'sdesigned appearance, durability,and safety are preserved. The useof Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New VehicleLimited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart, may be an acceptable choiceto maintain your vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM andmay not have been tested for yourvehicle. As a result, these partsmay fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems,and may not perform properlyin subsequent collisions.


Aftermarket parts are not coveredby your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failurerelated to such parts are notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

We recommend that you choose acollision repair facility that meetsyour needs before you ever needcollision repairs. Your dealer/retailermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate of the art equipment, or beable to recommend a collisionrepair center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your Vehicle

Protect your investment in your GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.

Many insurance policies providereduced protection to your GMvehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you assure yourvehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that assures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 12‑6.

Gather the following information:. Driver's name, address, phone

number. Driver's license number. Owner's name, address, phone

number. Vehicle license plate. Vehicle make, model and

model year


. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Insurance company and policynumber

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See After an AirbagInflates? on page 2‑32.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that your vehiclerequires damage repairs, GMrecommends that you take anactive role in its repair. If you havea pre-determined repair facility ofchoice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specifyto the facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, either newGenuine GM parts or recycled

original GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be coveredby your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withyour repair professional, and insiston Genuine GM parts. Remember ifyour vehicle is leased you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collisionpolicy repair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as cost stays within reasonablelimits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on engines,transmission, axle, suspension,brakes, electrical, steering,body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of your vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle.The owner manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.


In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Current and Past ModelOrder Forms

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, specifyyear and model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover),visit Helm, Inc. on the World WideWeb at: helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

Note to Canadian Customers:All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Canadian residents are tomake checks payable in U.S. funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign.


However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safecar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safecar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that your vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, in additionto notifying General Motors ofCanada Limited. Call them at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada) in a situationlike this, please notify GeneralMotors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7


Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, your vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer/retailertechnician service your vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how you operate the vehicle,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayalso retain the owner’s personalpreferences, such as radio pre-sets,seat positions, and temperaturesettings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data thatwill assist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.


GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request of police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If your vehicle has OnStar and yousubscribe to the OnStar services,please refer to the OnStar Termsand Conditions for information ondata collection and use. See alsoOnStar® System on page 4‑44 inthis manual for more information.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation system operating manualfor information on stored data andfor deletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote doorlocking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with RSS-210/211 ofIndustry and Science Canada.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-38

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . 9-13Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31

Airbag System (cont.)What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .2-32

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .2-27AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38

Passenger Status Indicator . . .4-17Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Alarm SystemAnti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . 8-38, 9-26AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11AntennaMulti-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18

Anti-TheftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12Alarm System Messages . . . . .4-37

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-81Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-85

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19

Audio SystemRadio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 8-35Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37Shiftlock Control SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . 6-28, 6-31

i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . 9-29Bluetooth . . . . 6-42, 6-43, 6-46, 6-58Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 8-28Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 9-35Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . .9-36

Bulb Replacement (cont.)Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . .9-35

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .8-54Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 8-49Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . ivCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 1-9Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v

CDDVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 3-1Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 4-18CheckEngine Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18Ignition Transmission Lock . . .9-28

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .2-50

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56, 2-58Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46Where to Put the Restraint . . .2-48

CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-81Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-85

INDEX i-3

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 7-1Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10, 4-11Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 12-10Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16Engine Temperature Gage . . . .4-15

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8

CoversCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 12-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 12-12

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 12-10Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 12-15Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . 6-28, 6-31Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . .8-38, 9-26

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

DrivingBetter Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-58

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .8-20If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .8-23Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .8-24Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

DVDRear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33

DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

i-4 INDEX

EECO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37Economy ModeFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37

Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64

Electrical SystemEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13Check and Service EngineSoon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18

Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . 9-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31Coolant Temperature Gage . . .4-15Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15Cooling System Messages . . .4-33Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

Engine (cont.)Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24Running While Parked . . . . . . . .8-34Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 12-15Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 5-1

FFilterEngine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . .9-13

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 5-2Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . . .9-13Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . 5-3, 9-35Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-55Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Economy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-57

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-56Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .8-54Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .8-54Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .4-25Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-54Requirements, California . . . . .8-54System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35

Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

INDEX i-5

GGagesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-54

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . .10-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-57Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 5-2Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .4-26High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 5-2Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .4-27

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15HeaterEngine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 8-20Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 8-41Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 6-1

i-6 INDEX

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 4-35Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 1-3

Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . 9-44LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 5-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .4-18On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

LATCH SystemReplacing Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55

Latch, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

LiftgateCarbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 1-9

LightStabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23

LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22

Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .4-24Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26

Lights (cont.)High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 5-2Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .4-15Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .4-23

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22LocksDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 4-25Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

INDEX i-7

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . .10-2Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 4-18Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37Mass Storage Media (MEM) . . . 6-25MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .4-37Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .4-33Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35

Messages (cont.)Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35Object Detection System . . . . .4-35Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .4-36Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

NNavigation SystemVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 8-28

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .9-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 2-41Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

i-8 INDEX

OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-5

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33

Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15ParkingAssist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-46Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . .9-28

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .8-33Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Passenger Sensing System . . . 2-33Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . . 9-3

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . 6-42, 6-43,

6-46, 6-58PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .8-29Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17

Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 12-16

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .12-8

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 12-16Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 8-49Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 4-8Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .1-16

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54

INDEX i-9

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . 9-78Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 2-40Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 12-14General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 11-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37

Safety Belts (cont.)Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .2-24Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .2-23

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 12-14General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 10-2Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 12-8SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 2-6Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 2-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56, 2-58

i-10 INDEX

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . 9-4Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . .4-18Maintenance Records . . . . . . 10-10Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . . 11-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .12-8Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 2-38

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33

SidemarkerBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . . . 4-23Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Stoplamps and Back-Up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35

StorageMass Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . .6-25

Storage AreasCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vSystemRoof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

System CheckAutomatic TransmissionShiftlock Control . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

INDEX i-11

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 12-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 1-13Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10, 4-11TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64Inflation Monitor System . . . . . .9-53Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24Pressure Monitor System . . . . .9-51

Tires (cont.)Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . .9-63When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58

TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .8-58Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-63General Information . . . . . . . . . .8-57Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .9-78Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-61Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .8-64Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-78

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .8-41Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .8-64

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35

i-12 INDEX

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 8-46Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61

Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ivControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-78

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

WWarning Lights, Gages, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . vHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

Where to Put the ChildRestraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . 9-29WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner's Manual

Documents

Transcript of 2010 Chevrolet Equinox Owner's Manual